Quarterlytics / Financial Services / Asset Management - Income / IG Design Group Plc

IG Design Group Plc

igr · LSE Financial Services
Claim this profile
Ticker igr
Exchange LSE
Sector Financial Services
Industry Asset Management - Income
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2019 Annual Report · IG Design Group Plc
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
I

G

D

e

s

i

g

n

G

r

o

u

p

p

l

c

A

N

N

U

A

L

R

E

P

O

R

T

A

N

D

F

I

N

A

N

C

I

A

L

S

T

A

T

E

M

E

N

T

S

2

0

1

9

IG Design Group plc
ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
WHAT’S INSIDE

STRATEGIC REPORT

GOVERNANCE

A review of the Group’s strategy with a more 
detailed look at activity during the financial 
year together with its risk management.

01  About us

02  Our commitment to shareholders

04  At a glance

06  Business model

08  Our strategy

16  Social responsibility

18   Executive review

36  Principal risks and uncertainties

Information on how the Group is governed 
and activities of the Board. 

40   Board of Directors

42 

 Chairman’s corporate governance review

51   Audit Committee report

54   Directors’ remuneration report

59   Directors’ report

61    Statement of Directors’ responsibilities

FINANCIALS – GROUP

FINANCIALS – COMPANY

The Group’s consolidated financial statements 
and comprehensive notes covering the year 
ended 31 March 2019.

The Company’s financial statements and 
comprehensive notes covering the year ended 
31 March 2019. 

62   Independent auditor’s report

66   Consolidated income statement

112  Company balance sheet

113   Company statement of changes in equity

67    Consolidated statement of comprehensive income

114  Company cash flow statement

68   Consolidated statement of changes in equity

115   Notes to the Company financial statements

69   Consolidated balance sheet

70   Consolidated cash flow statement

71   Notes to the consolidated financial statements

Alternative performance measures
This review includes alternative performance measures (‘APMs’) 
that are presented in addition to the standard IFRS metrics. The 
Directors believe that these APMs provide important additional 
information regarding the adjusted performance of the business 
including trends, performance and position of the Group. APMs 
are used to enhance the comparability of information between 
reporting periods and segmental business units by adjusting 
for exceptional or uncontrollable factors which affect IFRS 
measures, to aid the understanding of the Group’s performance. 
Consequently, APMs are used by the Directors and management 
for strategic and performance analysis, planning, reporting and 
reward setting. 

In order to show when such measures have been used, the APMs 
are highlighted in blue throughout the executive review. 

The APMs are adjusted profit, adjusted EBITDA, adjusted 
operating profit and adjusted EPS. The definitions of the APMs 
used are listed below: 

•  Adjusted EPS – Fully diluted earnings per share before tax, 

exceptional items, acquisition amortisation and LTIP charges 

•  Adjusted profit – Profit before tax, exceptional items, 

acquisition amortisation and LTIP charges

•  Adjusted operating profit – Profit before interest, tax, 

exceptional items, acquisition amortisation and LTIP charges

•  Adjusted EBITDA – EBITDA before exceptional items and 

LTIP charges

Further detail can be seen on pages 28 and 29.

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019ABOUT US

We are Design Group 

We transform paper and a whole lot 
more into products that help the world 
celebrate life’s special occasions.

We are proud to serve the best retailers 
around the globe with a complete 
end-to-end service from design to 
distribution.

OUR GOALS ARE

Customers

Team

Suppliers

Investors

to be the ‘partner 
of choice’ across 
an increasing range 
of products and 
categories where our 
customers value our 
fast pace, innovation, 
market focus and 
flexibility

to have a creative 
and winning culture 
focused on developing 
a team that looks to 
accomplish great 
things

to build relationships 
with suppliers who 
provide capacity and 
enable us to compete 
profitably and share 
our passion for design 
and innovation

continue to grow our 
Group and deliver 
returns well above 
market performance

01

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019OUR COMMITMENT  
TO SHAREHOLDERS

Delivering growth

Adjusted EPS

Continue to deliver double digit three year  
compound annual growth

Adjusted EPS 
(pence)

13.2

11.5

29.3

+33%
on 2018

22.1

18.6

Through organic growth and acquisitions

2015

2016

2017

2018

2019

2019 reported diluted earnings per share 16.0p (2018: 20.5p)

Generating cash

Average leverage

Average leverage

4.1x

Sustain long term average leverage between  
1.0x and 2.0x

3.2x

2.3x

+13%
improvement
on 2018

Provides capacity for future investment

1.5x

1.3x

2015

2016

2017

2018

2019

Improving returns

Dividends 
(pence)

Dividend

Trend upwards until 2.5x covered (40% pay out)

8.5 +42%
on 2018

6.0

4.5

Growth supported increased shareholder distributions

2.5

1.0
2015

2016

2017

2018

2019

Alternative performance measures: we use both statutory reported and adjusted measures in our strategic report. Adjusted measures in management’s view reflect the 
underlying performance of the business and provides a more meaningful comparison of how the business is managed and measured day-to-day. A full reconciliation between 
our reported and adjusted results is provided in our alternative performance measures section on pages 28 and 29.

02

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
Key financial performance indicators

Revenue

Adjusted profit before tax

£448.4m

£30.3m

2018:  
£21.8m

2018: £327.5m
+37%

Reported profit before tax

£17.3m

2018:  
£19.7m

Adjusted EBITDA

Average debt

£38.7m

£48.8m

2018: £28.0m
+38%

2018: £41.9m
+16%

Cash conversion

Return on capital employed

130.5%

2018: 80.5%

24.3%

2018: 22.5%

03

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019AT A GLANCE

We’re truly international, with 11,000 customers selling our products 
through over 210,000 stores across more than 80 countries, we enjoy 
considerable market presence around the world.

Revenue by customer destination

ROW 
£10.0m 
2%

Australia 
£37.7m 
8%

Europe 
£68.3m 
15%

USA  
£235.1m 
53%

UK 
£97.3m 
22%

Focused on our four major product categories 
of Celebrations, Stationery and creative play, 
Gifting and ‘Not-for-resale’ consumables, 
we leverage our Group size and expertise 
whilst retaining local market knowledge and 
relationships through our local businesses.

04

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019This blend of global scale and local knowledge allows us to offer 
our customers a high quality ‘one-stop-shop’ solution from small 
independents to large multinational retailers and e-tailers. In addition 
to our own generic brands, our design-led product offerings include 
an excellent portfolio of licensed and customer bespoke products.

Revenue by season

56%

Christmas

Revenue by product

77%

Celebrations

Revenue by source

30%

70%

Manufactured in-house

Sourced

39%

Everyday

5%

Minor 
seasons

11%

8%

4%

Gifting

Stationery(a) NFR(b)

(a)  Stationery and creative play.

(b)  ‘Not-for-resale’ consumables.

05

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019BUSINESS MODEL

Design Group is a global manufacturer and distributor of 
design-led Celebration, Stationery and creative play, Gifting, 
‘Not-for-resale’ consumables and related products.

P r o duct Design
&   D evelopment

Customers

Being their Partner
of choice

g

g

M anufacturin
& Sourcin

D

&

i

s

F

t

r
i

u

l

b

fi

u

l

t
i

m

o

e

n

n

t

06

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
Customers
We are proud to serve 
the best retailers around 
the world. We provide 
a complete end-to-end 
service from design concept 
to store shelf

11,000 customers with product in over 210,000 retail outlets in over 
80 countries

• 

It is our aim to be a partner of choice 
to our customers

•  Our customers benefit from our 

•  Our global scale gives us the ability 
to access the best products at the 
best prices for our customers

ability to deliver everything from small 
individual orders to large international 
programmes 

•  Our local teams have the expertise to 
ensure we know what works well for 
our customers in each market

Product Design 
& Development
Design is at the heart of 
everything we do

230 designers across four continents in eight studios, producing 
thousands of designs a year

•  We pride ourselves on always being 
at the very cutting edge of design 
trends and product development
•  Our businesses can all access these 
great designs through our global 
design hub 

•  Each business unit has a dedicated 

design team

•  We are continuously innovating fresh 
designs, including generic, customer 
bespoke and licensed branded 
offerings

Manufacturing  
& Sourcing
Our manufacturing facilities 
and global network of 
suppliers ensures we can 
turn our designs into high 
quality products for our 
customers

Over 50,000 SKUs manufactured and sourced annually

•  We manufacture a number of our 

core products in-house, including gift 
wrap, crackers, bags and cards 

•  For products that we source, we work 
with carefully selected partners to 
manufacture our designs

•  Sites in the UK, China, USA, 
Netherlands and Poland

•  We continuously invest in our 

manufacturing process resulting in 
some of the most efficient production 
facilities in the industry

•  Our manufacturing and sourcing 

network, which is subject to regular 
ethical, quality and technical 
audits, supported by our team of 
manufacturing and sourcing experts, 
ensures we deliver compliant and 
ethically sourced products

Distribution  
& Fulfilment
We understand that 
customers value excellent 
service and we have a track 
record of delivering on time 
and to high quality standards

Over 750 million units sold annually

•  We offer everything from ‘free on 

• 

board’, where the customer handles 
shipping, to merchandising solutions, 
where we deliver items into stores 
depending on customer needs
In each business unit across the 
world our experienced logistics 
teams process each retailer’s order 
through our global infrastructure of 
warehouses and fulfilment centres

•  Our ability to deliver on time/in full is 
a critical part of our service offering

•  We work with our customers to 

improve the process of getting stock 
to the shelf, helping reduce store 
costs and improve stock availability

07

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019OUR STRATEGY

Our strategy is built on leveraging our core strengths 
and focusing on the market opportunities.

istribution
ulfilm ent

D

 F
&

W o rking with
t h e winners

Customers

Being their Partner
of choice

i n
Manufac t u r
& Sour c i n g

g

P

r

o

&

D

d

e

u

v

c

t

e

l

o

D

p

e

s

i

g
n

m
e
n
t

n

D esign &
Innovatio

E

f

fi

&

c

i

S

e

c

n

a

c

l

e

y

08

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
Key strategic performance indicators

  Working with the winners

•  Increasing revenue through 

organic growth with both existing 
and new customers, suppliers and 
product areas

Level of business with 
our top 10 customers

Sales by channel

Definition: Percentage of Group revenue 
from our top 10 global customers

Definition: Growing our revenues across 
different sales channels

Why chosen: We pride ourselves on 
having long lasting relationships with the 
world’s leading retailers, and nurturing and 
maintaining these relationships allows us to 
grow as they do

Why chosen: Our ‘winners’ are a broad 
range of customers across various sales 
channels including mass and discount 
retailers, wholesalers, independents 
and other small channels. As the retail 
environment changes, we will measure our 
success in growth across these channels

  Design & innovation

•  Developing in new channels and 

New product category growth

Diversifying seasonality

adjacent product categories

•  Expanding in the growing number 
of events celebrated throughout 
the year

  Efficiency & scale

•  Driving margins through 
investment in processes 
and people

•  Accretive M&A opportunities 

to unlock synergies and 
strengthening our ‘one-stop-shop’ 
position with customers

Definition: New product category growth  
year-on-year

Definition: Year-on-year growth in 
categories other than Christmas products

Why chosen: It is important to stay ahead 
of the curve and introduce new segments 
and products that complement our existing 
ranges. This helps the Group grow in other 
areas and diversify our offering

Why chosen: We have in the past been 
a heavily Christmas-based business, 
and whilst this is still very important, 
we also want to focus on growing the 
non-Christmas (being minor seasons 
and everyday) part of our business

Adjusted operating margin

M&A and investment

Definition: Adjusted operating margin as a 
percentage of revenue

Definition: Capital expenditure and 
corporate acquisitions

Why chosen: Delivering value to our 
customers is essential and we must 
ensure we can continue to compete in 
our marketplace and win against other 
suppliers. To do this we aim to improve 
our margin through improved sourcing and 
ongoing manufacturing efficiency gains

Why chosen: Our ability to invest in 
efficiency improving projects helps support 
our competitive position, while our ability 
to execute earnings accretive M&A ensures 
the Group continues to grow its scale and 
reach, helping unlock new markets and 
synergies 

09

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019Growing revenue through organic growth 
with both existing and new customers, 
suppliers and product areas.

Why is this important?
Revenue growth is critical to the ongoing success and development 
of the Group. Our focus on working with the winners allows the Group 
to drive revenues with our key customers by being their partner of 
choice. As revenue grows this further underpins our relationship with 
our customers.

Level of business with our top 10 customers
(% of total revenue)

2019

2018

48%

39%

Sales by channel
(%)

2019

2018

62%

38%

50%

50%

 Mass and discount retailers
 Other

Progress in 2019
2019 has been another successful year for the Group in this 
focused area of our strategy. We have retained the majority 
of our key customers and have driven up our revenue 
through these winning partnerships. We have grown our 
own top 10 customer revenue to 48% of Group revenues 
(2018: 39%). We choose to partner with those customers 
that we see have growth potential, and focus on excellent 
customer service and quality products at good value to 
ensure we grow as our customers do.

Our sales by channel remains a key focus, in particular given 
the growth in mass and discount retailers in the market, 
such as Action, Aldi, Lidl and Dollar Tree. We continue to 
build our offering in this channel increasing sales by 71% to 
£277 million, which now represents 62% of Group revenues.

Priorities for 2020 and beyond
We will drive top line growth in the Group through focusing 
on our two main ‘working with the winners’ KPIs. Therefore 
our key priorities for 2020 will be:

•  Grow our level of business with our top 10 retailers
•  Grow our business within our channels

This includes maintaining and developing our key customer 
relationships around the Group, in particular with Walmart, 
given its prominence within the portfolio following the 
acquisition of Impact Innovation, Inc. (‘Impact’).

10

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019DELIVERING OUR  STRATEGYWorking with the winnersStrategy in action: 

Walmart

Walmart is the biggest retailer in 
the world, with global revenues 
in excess of $500 billion a 
year. In the US they operate 
from nearly 5,000 stores so it 
is therefore no surprise that 
Walmart are Design Group’s 
largest customer, accounting for 
about 20% of Group revenue.

Our relationship with Walmart 
was strengthened in the year 
following the acquisition of 
Impact Innovations, Inc. and 
following the transaction we are 
now a key partner supplying 
celebrations products such as 
seasonal décor and gift wrap.

It was a very proud moment 
and a great reflection of the 
fantastic support and dedication 
the team at Impact has given to 
Walmart when in March 2019 
we were awarded ‘Seasonal 
and Celebrations Supplier of 
the Year 2019’.

Strategy in action: 

Value/ 
Discounter  
customers

Value discounters are one 
of the fastest growing retail 
channels around the world 
and offer the Group significant 
growth opportunities. One of 
our key customers, with over 
1,300 stores across Europe, 
is a discounter focused on 
non-food offering. Last year 
alone they grew their store base 

in the Netherlands, Belgium, 
France, Germany, Luxembourg, 
Austria and Poland by 21%. 
Design Group has become one 
of their key business partners, 
growing our revenues with this 
discounter 53% year-on-year. 
This is driven by product 
innovation, all round service and 
a proactive approach.

11

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019Develop opportunities in new channels and 
adjacent product categories while expanding 
our presence in the growing market for 
celebration events throughout the year.

Why is this important?
Design and innovation are our life blood and key to the success of the 
Group going forward. Consumers are constantly looking for exciting 
ways to celebrate and our design teams are focused on providing fresh 
and new ways to enjoy our products. We focus on developing new 
ways to sell and also new product areas.

19.9

16.3

197.2

Progress in 2019
This financial year saw a first full year’s trading pattern of 
our ‘not-for-resale’ consumables. This exciting growth area 
contributed £19.9 million of our overall revenue in 2019, a 97% 
improvement year-on-year. On average this segment is growing 
at a fast pace of 53% over two years. This was supported by 
our investment in a second retail collateral bag machine in our 
manufacturing facility in Wales and should help drive this new 
segment even further in the coming financial year.

The second of our ‘new’ segments, Creative play, introduced 
in 2017, has seen a huge drive forward over the past three 
years, with revenues increasing by 67% in 2019 and at an 
average of 81% over two years. As outlined in our strategy 
in action section we are excited to grow this segment 
further by cross-selling to other areas of the Group. In 2019 
our Australian business sold AU$0.4 million of Anker Play 
Products that they hadn’t the year before.

Christmas sales accounted for nearly 56% of our business 
in 2019 and whilst this is still a huge focus for the Group, 
diversifying our offering outside of Christmas is a growth 
area for us. In 2019 we increased our non-Christmas sales 
by 24% to £197.2 million, with the category growing at an 
average of 18% over two years.

Priorities for 2020 and beyond
The Group will always remain focused on being on top of the 
latest trends in our product categories. In addition, in order to 
drive the business forward, we will look to expand our product 
offering outside of our core segments and seasons to ensure 
we also remain diverse and appeal to all consumers. 
Therefore our key priorities for the coming fiscal year are:

•  Growth in new segments
•  Expanding our non-Christmas sales

As well as these, we continue to ensure we have a high quality 
design and sales team attracting key talent in the industry. 
We will also continue to explore acquisitions that both 
complement, enhance and diversify our product portfolio.

‘Not-for-resale’ consumables
(Revenue £m)

2019

2018

2017

10.1

8.5

Creative play products
(Revenue £m)

2019

2018

2017

9.8

5.0

Seasonal diversity
(Non-Christmas revenue £m)

2019

2018

2017

12

158.6

140.8

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019DELIVERING OUR  STRATEGYDesign &  innovationStrategy in action: 

Sustainable 
products

Strategy in action: 

Anker Play 
Products

Environmental challenges that 
we all face have led to a joint 
effort between our customers, 
our suppliers and Design 
Group to seek new ways to 
design, develop, manufacture 
and distribute our products 
to ensure we are limiting our 
impact on the environment. 
This initiative is not only good 
for the environment but is 
also good business sense as 
consumers raise concerns 
about the sustainability 
of products sold in stores 

around the world. Amongst 
many examples of how we 
have changed, the Group 
has reduced our ‘one use’ 
packaging across a wide range 
of goods, reducing the amount 
of plastic and acetate used. In 
addition, the UK has launched 
our first fully recyclable cracker, 
the ‘Tom Smith Kraft Cracker’ 
with wooden content, no 
finishes and no plastic. We still 
have more to do however and 
remain focused on improving 
each year.

In 2017 we established a joint 
venture to build a business 
in the creative play category, 
an area we felt offered great 
opportunity as an adjacent 
category to our existing 
stationery and gifting product 
ranges.

Over the past two years the 
business has seen significant 
revenue growth from $0.9 million 
in 2017 to $14.5 million in 
2019 and continues to offer 
the opportunity for further 
successful growth. Currently 
the business is mainly US based 
but now it is more established 
it offers the cross selling 
opportunity for expansion 
into our other key territories – 
Australia, the UK and Europe.

13

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019Increasing margins through investments 
in process and people while pursuing 
accretive M&A opportunities focused on 
unlocking synergies and strengthening our 
‘one-stop-shop’ position with customers.

Why is this important?
Driving efficiencies through capital and people investment will 
help strengthen our margins, while carefully selected acquisitions 
that complement our business help deliver synergies and drive the 
overall scale of the Group.

Adjusted operating margin as % of revenue

7.1%

7.3%

5.7%

2017

2018

2019

Adjusted overheads as % of revenue

14.9%

14.4%

11.7%

2017

2018

2019

Progress in 2019
Our adjusted operating margin continues to improve 
year-on-year partially driven by a focus on driving 
efficiencies in our manufacturing processes.

Our continuing focus on cost management has driven 
adjusted overheads as a percentage of revenue down to 
11.7% in 2019 compared to 14.4% in 2018.

2019 saw the first full year of our high speed printing 
press in Europe operating. This hugely increased our 
manufacturing efficiencies and overall manufacturing 
capacity.

Further investment in processes this year included:

•  New ERP platform in our Americas business
•  A second retail collateral bag machine in Wales
•  New converting lines in the Netherlands

We have also built the strengths of our team through 
investing in new roles including:

•  MD of Global Procurement
•  Group Company Secretary/Legal Counsel
•  Chief Information Officer
•  Senior VP of Sales in the USA

Priorities for 2020 and beyond
• 
•  Delivering improved efficiency through further capital 

Increase operating margin

investment

66.8

•  Unlock c$5 million of synergies following the acquisition 

of Impact
Identifying further M&A opportunities

• 

M&A and investment
(£m)

2019

2018

2017

7.9

5.1

9.4

2.7

5.2

 Corporate acquisitions
 Capital expenditure

14

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019DELIVERING OUR  STRATEGYEfficiency  & scaleStrategy in action: 

Impact  
Innovations, 
Inc.

Strategy in action: 

Manufacturing
A new printing  
press

On 31 August 2018 we 
completed the acquisition of 
Impact Innovations, Inc., a 
leading supplier of gift wrap 
and seasonal décor products 
in the US for $73.5 million, plus 
a working capital adjustment, 
representing an EBITDA 
multiple of 4.9x.

This was a transformational 
deal for the Group creating 
the largest consumer gift 
packaging business in the 
world. It doubled our scale 
in the US and expanded our 

product range into the seasonal 
décor market. Furthermore the 
combined volumes unlocked the 
ability to create a world class 
manufacturing facility in the 
US, mirroring our operations in 
the UK and Europe, including 
planned operational synergies of 
$5 million per annum from 2021.

The deal was significantly 
accretive from day one and was 
supported by shareholders with 
a £50 million equity raise to help 
finance the acquisition.

In April 2018 our European 
manufacturing facility started 
production of gift wrap with 
its brand new state-of-the-art 
printing press. By June we had 
it printing at a record breaking 
800 metres per minute, at a 
speed of 72 miles per hour. 

This investment not only 
increased capacity in Europe, 
it also delivered a significant 
improvement in efficiency and 
will pay back in just under four 
years. The success of this 
investment helped support our 
business case to order another 
press for our US operation, 
following the acquisition of 
Impact. This press will be 
delivered in the last quarter of 
the 2019 calendar year and will 
be a key driver in the delivery 
of the $5 million synergies 
relating to the consolidation of 
our US manufacturing facilities 
following the acquisition.

15

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY

At Design Group we aim to lead the way in social responsibility 
through respecting our people and our environment and ensuring 
our supply chains are sourcing responsibly.

E n v ironmental

Customers

Being their Partner
of choice

P

r

o

&

D

d

e

u

v

c

t

e

l

o

D

p

e

s

i

g
n

m
e
n
t

istribution
ulfilm ent

D

 F
&

B

u

s

i

n

e

s

s

i n
Manufac t u r
& Sour c i n g

g

People

16

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
Environmental

People

Business

Our supply chain
It’s our responsibility to make sure every 
worker in our supply chain is protected and 
respected. In our facilities, we ensure that 
all employees receive the relevant living 
wage, and we promote equality amongst 
our workforce across all diversities. 
Employee safety is paramount throughout 
the Group and we ensure that we operate 
within all safety laws and regulations 
within the territories where we are based. 
Our code of business conduct sets out our 
position on all of these key principles and 
is being rolled out across the globe to all 
Design Group employees. 

Working closely with  
our suppliers
Design Group is committed to engage with 
our suppliers fairly and lawfully and source 
responsibly. We are SEDEX members and 
work closely with ‘Stronger Together’, 
a multi-stakeholder initiative aiming to 
reduce modern slavery, and our suppliers to 
ensure they respect human rights, promote 
decent working conditions and improve 
sustainability across our supply base. 

Responsible sourcing
Through regular audits (ethical, quality and 
technical) we work to ensure the factories 
with which we produce goods meet relevant 
requirements, which comply with standards 
set by Business Social Compliance Initiative 
(‘BSCI’), Ethical Trading Initiative (‘ETI’), 
Workplace Conditions Assessment (‘WCA’), 
and Consumer Trade Partnership Against 
Terrorism (‘CTPAT’). 

Environmental Taskforce
Environmental issues are taken very 
seriously given the nature of our business. 
As a Group we ensure that we are fully 
compliant with all legal environmental 
requirements. We encourage all parts of 
the business to look to reduce our impact 
on the environment and look to continually 
improve each year through the development 
of new environmentally friendly products 
and better processes that reduce our 
carbon footprint.

This year saw the launch of our 
Environmental Taskforce across the 
Group who will be working with third 
party specialist organisations, with the 
aim to be regarded by our customers as 
leaders in bringing improved sustainable 
product solutions to all product categories 
in the Group’s portfolio. The taskforce 
is comprised of a select group of senior 
management who are charged with 
enabling the people in our offices, 
warehouses and supply chains to bring the 
Group’s environmental agenda to life and 
into the core of their business practice. 

Key environmental initiatives
As a key part of the agenda we have 
identified initiatives that focus on ensuring 
that the Group is doing all it can to 
transform the effect of our business on the 
environment. These include using more 
sustainable materials in our production to 
move towards fully recyclable packaging, 
a focus on reducing our carbon footprint, 
reducing waste in the manufacturing 
process, and a continued focus on 
responsible sourcing. 

Starting with crackers
A recent developments is a completely 
recyclable cracker range for customers in 
the UK. Other initiatives include removing 
plastic from a selection of product 
packaging, removing non-recyclable glitter 
from a number of wrap ranges and reducing 
the size of wrap cores to reduce the 
volumes and cost of our transport. We still 
have a long way to go, but we will continue 
to improve year-on-year as increasing our 
attention on the environmental impact of 
the Group is moving us forward in the right 
direction.

A truly global workforce
The average number of employees during 
the year was 2,364 within Design Group. 
Our people are based across the globe, 
with offices in Australia, Hong Kong, China, 
the Netherlands, Poland, the USA and the 
UK. Not to mention our global sales team 
across many locations around the world. 

Our people make us  
who we are 
Design Group wouldn’t be who we 
are without the passion, drive and 
determination of our talented teams across 
the globe in all disciplines. They are the 
key to our success and we continue to 
work towards ensuring that our people are 
committed, loyal and engaged by investing 
in their capabilities and desire to learn and 
develop. 

Pages 44 and 45 of our corporate 
governance review highlights our focus on 
training, talent identification and personal 
development mechanisms as well as 
employee engagement.

A charitable bunch
One key desire of all our teams across 
the Group is to ensure that Design Group 
is making a positive difference in its 
surrounding communities. Teams across 
the globe have been involved in many 
charitable initiatives this year, including; 
raising money for Breast Cancer, donations 
to support Ronald McDonald House, 
provider of free ‘home away from home’ 
accommodation; donations of toys to 
Family Promise as well as reading to 
students within the Liberty County School 
System; and donating blankets for the 
winter months to Senior Citizens Inc. 
in Savannah. 

Design Group UK has teamed up with 
the Trussell Trust (UK national food bank 
coordinator) and for every case of catering 
crackers sold we donate £2 to the Trussell 
Trust. The Group team also spent an 
afternoon sorting donations for Willen 
Hospice who are providers of specialist 
palliative care in Milton Keynes. 

17

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019EXECUTIVE REVIEW

Investing in growth, 
delivering record 
profits.

Paul Fineman
Chief Executive Officer

Giles Willits
Chief Financial Officer

18

Overview
We are pleased to report that the 
Group has achieved another excellent 
year of adjusted profit and adjusted 
earnings per share growth as a 
result of strong performances from 
all regions. It is particularly pleasing 
to have delivered significant organic 
growth whilst also benefiting from 
the transformational acquisition of 
Impact Innovations Inc. (‘Impact’) 
and other capital investments across 
the Group. The diversified nature of our 
business, alongside excellent customer 
relationships, the strength of our 
design and innovation capabilities and 
our focus on service have combined 
to make this another record year for 
IG Design Group plc. 

Furthermore, our focus on cash 
generation has resulted in a significant 
increase in our year-end cash, and 
delivered a further reduction in 
average leverage, despite increased 
capital and acquisition investment. 

During the year, Group revenue 
increased by 37% to £448.4 million 
(2018: £327.5 million) with adjusted 
profit before tax increasing by 39% 
to £30.3 million (2018: £21.8 million). 
Adjusted earnings per share 
increased 33% to 29.3p (2018: 22.1p). 
Average leverage improved from 
1.5 times to 1.3 times, whilst the 
year-end positive net cash balance 
increased from £4.4 million in 2018 
to £17.1 million in 2019, reflecting 
the effectiveness of our focus on 
converting profit into cash and the 
highly cash generative dynamics within 
our business.

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019Adjusted profit before tax 

Adjusted earnings per share 

Adjusted cash generated 
from operations

£30.3m

29.3p

£50.5m

Reported profit before tax 

Reported earnings per share 

£17.3m

16.0p

Reported profit before tax 
reduced from £19.7 million in 2018 
to £17.3 million in the current year, 
primarily as a result of the exceptional 
cost associated with the acquisition 
of Impact and the subsequent 
restructuring in the US. Reported 
diluted earnings per share is 16.0p 
(2018: 20.5p). 

The results are testament to our 
successful focus on the Group’s key 
strategic drivers; working with the 
winners in both existing and new 
channels and markets; design and 
innovation, growing existing, new 
and adjacent product categories; 
and efficiency and scale, investing 
in state-of-the-art machinery across 
the globe, growing our scale through 
acquisitions and leveraging synergies 
from these. 

The combination of reduced average 
leverage and strong cash generation 
has underpinned a 42% increase in the 
dividend from a level of 6.0p for 2018 
to a total of 8.5p for 2019. This increase 
not only reflects the growth in the 
business but also the commitment 
to reduce dividend cover, which 
decreased to 3.4 times compared to 
3.7 times in the prior year.

Our strategy
Our business is successful as a result 
of our focus on growing by maximising 
the impact of our key strategic drivers, 
which underpin the Group’s ethos and 
are broken down into three key areas: 

Working with the winners 
We are focused on increasing our 
revenue and profitability through 
growth in both existing and new 
channels and markets by ensuring 
we maintain excellent relationships 
with our key customers, as well as 
developing relationships with new 
customers. We want to be part of our 
customers’ success stories. As the 
retail market evolves and progresses, 
we work closely with our key customers 
with the aim of being their partner 
of choice going forward. Our top 10 
customers now account for 48% of our 
global revenues (2018: 39%).

In order to do this, we need to have 
the capability to manufacture and/
or source a broad range of products, 
leveraging from improved sourcing 
processes as our business grows. 
Many of our customers work 
across multiple territories and have 
global ambitions. As such, our 
geographic and channel diversity 
in key markets is essential to help 
support our customers as they grow. 
Our businesses are experts in their 
territories and we ensure that we know 
what works well for our customers in 
each of those markets. 

Reported cash generated 
from operations

£44.8m

To continue our growth trajectory 
with our customers, we follow key 
market trends including the increase 
in consumer demand for mainstream 
mass and discount retailers, as well as 
specialist ‘experiential’ retailers and 
e-commerce opportunities. 

Our focus on working with the winners 
helps ensure we are benefiting as our 
customers continue to grow. But it also 
requires us to decide who we will not 
work with and this has been especially 
important during a year that has 
witnessed challenging retail markets, 
with a number of high profile retailers 
facing financial troubles. This is 
highlighted by our low bad debt write 
offs at 0.1% of revenues.

The Impact acquisition has resulted 
in a strengthening of our relationship 
with Walmart, the largest retailer in 
the world. With over 11,000 stores 
worldwide, Walmart is our largest 
customer, and now accounts for 
approximately 20% of the Group’s 
revenue. Our focus on great customer 
service is a must for maintaining 
and developing all relationships, and 
we were delighted that Impact was 
awarded Walmart Supplier of the Year 
in March 2019. Next year will see us 
continue to grow our business with 
Walmart. 

19

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019In 2019 over

750 million

units of consumer products sold

20

EXECUTIVE REVIEW  
CONTINUED

Revenue driven by our transformational 
acquisition and significant organic growth.

Our strategy continued

Design & innovation
Our customers, as do their customers, 
look to us to be at the forefront of 
product design and innovation. 
This means we look to develop the 
best designs for innovative and quality 
products, while maintaining a focus on 
value and consumer appeal. 

The Group has succeeded in growing 
revenues through developing new 
and adjacent category products as 
well as increasing revenues in existing 
product areas. The addition of Impact 
product categories has strengthened 
the Group’s ability to offer a complete 
‘one-stop-shop’ to customers including 
products not previously forming part of 
the Group’s portfolio such as Seasonal 
décor. We also continue to diversify our 
product range by focusing on occasions 
other than Christmas that are celebrated 
across the globe throughout the year 
with ‘minor seasons’ now generating 
over £20 million in global sales.

During the year we again saw a 
significant increase in revenues in the 
US from our focus on our Creative play 
and related products business. We are 
now looking to leverage across all of 
the territories in which we operate 
around the world, while also further 
expanding our ‘not-for-resale’ products 
revenue which has now broadened 
in terms of product offering and 
geographical reach. 

Technological development is a key 
part of this strategy and this extends 
to adapting to changes in consumer 
habits and being dynamic in providing 
customers with new channels to 
purchase their celebration products. 
We have been busy developing new 
celebration product offers that work 
online and will be trialling these with 
customers during the remainder of the 
2019 calendar year. 

Coupled with innovation in product 
design, we have also increased our 
focus on developing more sustainable 
products and improved sourcing, 
manufacturing and distribution to 
reduce our global carbon footprint. 
We believe this focus is not only the 
right strategy to help the environment 
but can also be a source of competitive 
advantage. Recent highlights include 
developing a completely recyclable 
cracker range for customers in the 
UK, removing plastic from a selection 
of product packaging, removing 
non-recyclable glitter from a number 
of wrap, bag and card ranges and 
reducing the size of wrap cores to 
further rationalise shipping volumes 
and cost. We are committed to 
continuously increasing our attention 
to the environmental impact of the 
Group and have recently established 
an Environmental Taskforce that will 
be working with third party specialist 
organisations. We wish to ensure 
that we can be regarded by our 
customers as leaders in bringing 
improved sustainable product solutions 
to all product categories in the 
Group’s portfolio. 

Efficiency & scale
As we grow we remain intent on 
driving up operating margins through 
investment in processes and people 
as well as by unlocking synergies 
following acquisitions, using our global 
reach and capabilities to leverage 
Group economies of scale. 

The year has seen significant capital 
investment across the Group totalling 
£7.9 million (2018: £9.4 million). 
Key areas included investment in 
further bag making equipment in 
the UK to support the growth of our 
‘not-for-resale’ business, in new paper 
converting lines in the Netherlands 

and the continued investment in our 
US IT capabilities. As ever, we look for 
quick return projects that help increase 
our capacity, improve our efficiency 
and deliver a better service. 

In addition we are building the 
capabilities of the team around the 
Group. In the US this included the 
excellent team at Impact, and a new 
Chief Information Officer. In Asia we 
have introduced a newly created 
position of Global Procurement 
Managing Director and at Group we 
have added a Group Legal Counsel 
to the team. These new positions 
help extend the strength of the teams 
around the world, bringing new skills 
that will ensure we are properly 
resourced to deliver our strategy. 

Furthermore, the acquisition of Impact 
was a pivotal moment for the Group 
further extending the geographical 
diversity of the business. Impact is one 
of the leading suppliers of gift wrap 
and seasonal décor products in the 
US, with long standing relationships 
with major US retailers. Following 
the acquisition in August 2018, the 
Group has proceeded quickly with the 
integration of Impact with our existing 
US business, combining manufacturing 
operations into one facility in Memphis 
and we are already seeing the benefits 
from the synergies and the increased 
scale of the overall business, including 
successes in cross selling Impact 
products across the Group. 

21

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019EXECUTIVE REVIEW  
CONTINUED

Strong cash conversion supported increased investment 
while delivering reduced average leverage.

Targets for growth
Our strategy focuses on delivering 
the following key commitments to 
shareholders:

•  double-digit growth in adjusted 

earnings per share – over the past 
five years we have averaged 28% 
annual growth; 

•  maintaining average leverage 

between 1.0 times and 2.0 times – 
since 2015 the Group’s leverage has 
reduced from 4.1 times to 1.3 times 
for the year ended 31 March 2019; 
and 

•  a progressive dividend policy 

targeting dividend cover of 2.5 
times earnings per share in the near 
future – in 2019, dividend cover 
reduced to 3.4 times.

Outlook
The Group is focused on continuing 
to deliver year-on-year growth and we 
are greatly encouraged with prospects 
for this trend to continue in 2020 
and beyond. Despite the ongoing 
challenging retail marketplace, and 
geo-political uncertainties, our order 
book across the business shows 
pleasing growth year-on-year. In the US 
we continue our focus on delivering the 
synergies from the acquisition of Impact 
and the subsequent restructuring of 
the business. This includes further 
investment in our IT systems, taking 
delivery of our new printing press in 
the US and further restructuring and 
rationalisation of processes. 

We continue to invest in building the 
capability and strength of our teams 
around the world to ensure we remain 
agile to the opportunities that will 
deliver further successes. In particular, 
in the US we have recently recruited 
new senior management to lead our 
sales and manufacturing teams. 

We continue to set ourselves ambitious 
targets and remain focused on creating 
value for all stakeholders through the 
delivery of our strategy. We are excited 
by the positive start to the new financial 
year and the potential to drive the 
business forward through compelling 
M&A opportunities. 

Acquisition of 
Impact drives 
revenue increase 
of 27%

Adjusted operating 
margin increased 
to 7.3%

Over 750 million 
units sold, across 
more than 50,000 
SKUs

22

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019Operational regional highlights
Our Group looks to leverage our global scale as a diversified, design-led, multi-product category and multi-channel business 
supported by world class manufacturing and sourcing operations. With an effective mix of creativity and reliability, our teams 
strive to deliver commercially successful design, product development and innovation across our global customer base. 
The success of this can be seen by the resulting growth in all of our regions in the year ended 31 March 2019.

Segmental revenue 

Adjusted operating profit 

Adjusted margin

% Group   
revenue 

2019 

2018 

% growth 

50%  Americas 

28%  UK  

14%  Europe 

$m 

£m 

€m 

9% 

Australia 

AU$m 

(1%)  Elims/Central 
costs 

£m 

100%  Total 

 £m 

289.9  

127.1  

73.0  

70.3  

(5.5) 

448.4  

158.8  

123.3  

58.5  

63.1  

(4.8) 

327.5  

83% 

3% 

25% 

11% 

— 

37% 

2019 

20.0  

8.1  

10.0  

7.7  

(4.1) 

32.6  

2018 

% growth 

12.7  

7.9  

7.5  

5.0  

(4.0) 

23.2  

57% 

3% 

33% 

54% 

— 

41% 

2019 
% 

6.9% 

6.4% 

13.7% 

10.9% 

2018 
%

8.0%

6.4%

12.9%

7.9%

—  

7.3% 

—

7.1% 

Americas 
Our Americas business has undergone 
significant change in 2019. With the 
Impact acquisition we have doubled 
the size of the US business, leading 
to a significant restructure to merge 
our manufacturing facilities into one 
location, as well as affecting the 
planned ERP systems implementation. 

Despite all of this change, the US has 
delivered strong results with revenue 
increasing 83% to $289.9 million 
(2018: $158.8 million), of which 
$114.9 million related to the Impact 
acquisition. Adjusted operating 
profit followed a similar trend, up 57% 
at $20.0 million (2018: $12.7 million). 
The Americas now accounts for 50% 
(2018: 37%) of the Group’s revenues. 
Adjusted operating margins at 
6.9% were down on the previous year 
primarily reflecting the acquisition 
of Impact and the mix of product 
revenues. Going into 2020 margins 
are set to improve reflecting the 
full year of Impact, the delivery of 
synergies following the acquisition and 
subsequent US restructuring, as well 
as further improvements in product mix 
toward higher margin categories. 

The Group has shown good organic 
growth across all channels, but in 
particular in our Creative play offering 
in the Americas. Anker Play Products, 
launched as a start up in July 2016, 
delivered its first year of profit within 
just three years from launch. 

This is a particularly pleasing start and 
is set to continue with the 2020 order 
book already looking very promising 
as we continue to develop our offering 
both in the Americas as well as 
globally. 

The most prominent story for the US 
business is the acquisition of Impact. 
Formerly a competitor of Design 
Group in the US gift wrap sector, the 
combined synergies and expertise we 
now have as a result of the acquisition 
puts us on a great footing going 
forward. 

The integration of facilities is going 
to plan, with gift wrap manufacturing 
operations now under one roof in our 
Memphis facilities. This underpins 
our drive to improve efficiencies in 
our manufacturing processes in the 
region, and further capital investment 
is underway in this respect with the 
delivery of the new state-of-the-art 
printing press scheduled for the final 
quarter of the 2019 calendar year. 
Since the acquisition in August 2018 
we have already seen the delivery 
of identified operational synergies 
in line with expectations, as well as 
strong revenue growth in their two 
main product categories and excellent 
growth of Impact’s ‘not-for-resale’ 
category which achieved record 
revenue levels. We remain firmly 
on track to deliver by 2021 annual 
operational savings of $5 million. 

The addition of Impact and their 
extended product offering allows 
the Group to offer adjacent product 
categories to our customer base 
and provides good cross-selling 
opportunities which we will continue 
to develop over the coming years 
having already seen early success in 
Seasonal décor in the UK.

The new ERP system has gone 
live in the business, with additional 
roll-out and development by the end 
of 2020. The new system will not 
only drive further efficiencies from 
one standardised operating platform 
but also increase the US business’ 
capacity and is a key enabler for the 
growth plans in this territory. 

We continue to monitor the 
developments of the ongoing trade 
discussions between the US and 
Chinese governments. The business 
has been highly pro-active in 
implementing mitigation strategies and 
has to date, successfully managed the 
effect of the 10% tariffs introduced 
in September 2018, and is currently 
reviewing the full extent of the recent 
increase of tariffs to 25%. We expect 
the financial effect to be limited to 
the usual financial contingencies 
maintained by the Group and that the 
successful strategies we have adopted 
to date continue to be effective. 

23

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
EXECUTIVE REVIEW  
CONTINUED

Revenues of 
‘not-for-resale’ 
products doubling 
to almost 
£20 million globally

24% increase 
in value of 
non-Christmas 
season products

£7.9 million in fast 
payback capital 
expenditure

Additional product innovation this 
financial year includes the development 
and launch of our sustainable product 
portfolio which includes stationery 
made from recycled materials. 

Europe 
Our business in Europe delivered 
another excellent performance in 2019 
accounting for 14% (2018: 16%) of the 
Group’s revenue. Sales increased 25% 
to €73.0 million (2018: €58.5 million) 
with adjusted operating margins up 
to 13.7% (2018: 12.9%). As a result, 
adjusted operating profit was up 
33% to €10.0 million (2018: €7.5 million). 
This is driven by organic growth and 
an excellent example of the Group’s 
‘working with the winners’ strategy 
in action. 

The European business has some 
excellent trading relationships with 
key leading retailers across the region. 
For example, Anchor, our business 
in the Netherlands selling on-trend 
photo frames and photo-based 
gift accessories, has built on its 
relationship with its main customer, 
a fast-growing international non-food 
discounter with stores across Europe. 
Anchor has been a key business 
partner throughout their historic and 
continued growth. Sales in this area 
have achieved another record level this 
financial year. 

In addition, our Celebrations 
business in the Netherlands, which 
is benefiting from its investment in a 
new state-of-the-art printing press 
in March 2018, has also focused 
on extending category offerings, 
increasing SKUs and developing new 
business with key customers, including 
a fast-growing major discount grocer. 

Australia
Sales in Australia achieved record 
levels, up 11% year-on-year at 
AU$70.3 million (2018: AU$63.1 million), 
with adjusted operating margins 
improving at 10.9% (2018: 7.9%), 
delivering adjusted operating profit 
up 54% at AU$7.7 million (2018: 
AU$5.0 million). Our business in 
Australia accounted for 9% of overall 
Group revenue (2018: 11%). 

The acquisition of Biscay Pty Limited 
(‘Biscay’) in January 2018 has 
delivered the expected synergies 
and growth in our Australian business 
despite market headwinds. Margins 
have improved as a result of focus in 
improved product mix. 

The Australian business faces 
challenging market conditions with 
some rationalisation of our national 
accounts. As such we expect revenues 
to step back in 2020 with resulting 
effect on operating profits, albeit the 
effect on EPS will be tempered by the 
ownership structure in this region. 

Operational regional highlights 
continued

UK 
Sales volumes and values continue to 
grow in our UK business, which now 
accounts for 28% (2018: 38%) of our 
overall Group revenue. Sales in the UK 
increased 3% to £127.1 million (2018: 
£123.3 million) delivering adjusted 
operating profit up 3% at £8.1 million 
(2018: £7.9 million) in a very challenging 
retail market. 

The unification of the UK business 
continues to evolve, and this year saw 
a further rationalisation of the UK team 
and further development of processes 
and activities to leverage our scale in 
the UK. Whilst we are seeing benefits 
from the move towards increased 
cohesiveness, as can be seen in the 
revenue and profit growth, the market 
is still very competitive reflected by our 
flat adjusted operating margins.

Our ‘not-for-resale’ bags initiative, 
launched in 2018, continues to be 
a growth area for the UK business. 
We have invested in an additional 
bag machine this financial year, 
underpinning our view that this is an 
excellent opportunity to grow the 
business with a new product offering 
and develop relationships with new 
customers. Sales in this product 
category alone have grown 53% 
compared to 2018. We expect 2020 to 
see further growth in bag production 
volumes with new customers.

24

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019In 2019 over

500 million

metres of ribbon sold

25

In 2019 over

20 million

photo frames sold

26

EXECUTIVE REVIEW  
CONTINUED

Our products and brands 

Revenue by product category 

Celebrations 

Stationery and creative play 

Gifting 

‘Not-for-resale’ consumables 

Total 

31 March 2019 

31 March 2018

% 

77 

8 

11 

4 

£m 

345.3 

36.9 

46.3 

19.9 

448.4 

% 

74 

10 

13 

3 

£m

243.5

31.2

42.6

10.2

327.5

Part of the Group’s ongoing strategy 
is to be partner of choice to our 
customers which means providing 
our broad customer base with a 
‘one-stop-shop’ product offering which 
is a compelling blend of great design 
and value for money products across 
all our categories. This was further 
enhanced this year with the acquisition 
of Impact, adding Seasonal décor to 
our product categories. 

A key focus, more so than ever before, 
both this year and going forward is 
the development of innovative and 
design-led products that are highly 
attractive to our customers, and in turn 
to their customers. This, combined with 
our proven ability to deliver first class 
customer service continues to drive our 
business forward. 

Our culture is one of ongoing 
improvement, with a determination to 
perpetually ‘raise the bar’ in all aspects 
of our business and this continues 
to be a mantra we firmly adhere to. 
With our development of sustainable 
and recycled products and offering 
acetate free, fully recyclable packaging 
where possible, we aim to set an 
industry standard when it comes to 
environmental approach. 

Since last year, we have evolved even 
further as a diversified, multi-category, 
multi-channel and multi-product 
manufacturer and supplier with our 
activities and sales generated across 
four core categories: 

• 

• 

• 

• 

‘Celebrations’, including gift 
packaging, greetings, seasonal 
décor and partyware products;
‘Stationery and creative play’, 
including home, school and office 
products;
‘Gifting’, our design-led giftware 
products category; and
‘Not-for-resale’ consumables 
focused on branded store bags, 
and now point of purchase products. 

All our core product categories 
grew in the year with strong growth 
specifically in Stationery and creative 
play and Gifting driven by our focus on 
new higher margin sales initiatives in 
these areas.

This year, excluding ‘not-for-resale’ 
consumables, we estimate that over 
750 million items, from over 50,000 
SKUs have been manufactured, 
sourced and delivered to our 
customers during the year, of which 
31%, £137.4 million sales, carry our 
Group’s generic and licensed brands. 
Particular growth year-on-year has 
been in Celebrations, Creative play 
products and our new Seasonal 
décor offering. 

The business successfully continued 
to broaden the sales generated 
throughout the year outside of specific 
Christmas based products increasing 
sales generated in our ‘Everyday’ and 
‘Minor seasons’ by 24% year-on-year, 
which together account for 44% of the 
total revenues of the Group. 

The increasing retail focus on 
celebrating Valentines, Easter and 
other than Christmas events led 
to revenues for these occasions 
exceeding £20 million. This is an 
exciting growth opportunity for all the 
business units across the Group. 

The Group has a strong team of 
experts within our sourcing and 
manufacturing operations based 
in Hong Kong and China, together 
with a broadening base throughout 
Asia, which was further enhanced by 
Impact’s sourcing team which joined 
us in September 2018. The sourcing 
teams have maintained their continued 
performance record and delivered 
excellent standards of service that 
further boosts ongoing loyalty of our 
large customer base.

Our team
Design Group wouldn’t be what it 
is without the passion, drive and 
determination of our talented teams 
across the globe in all disciplines. 
They are the key to our success 
and we continue to further invest in 
our teams by building on their core 
capabilities. We are, once again, 
hugely thankful to all of our colleagues 
for their contribution during what 
has been another year of exceptional 
performance in ever more challenging 
and competitive markets.

27

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
EXECUTIVE REVIEW  
CONTINUED

Alternative performance measures

This review includes alternative 
performance measures (‘APMs’) 
that are presented in addition to the 
standard IFRS metrics. The Directors 
believe that these APMs provide 
important additional information 
regarding the adjusted performance 
of the business including trends, 
performance and position of the 
Group. APMs are used to enhance the 
comparability of information between 
reporting periods and segmental 
business units by adjusting for 
exceptional or uncontrollable factors 
which affect IFRS measures, to aid 
the understanding of the Group’s 
performance. Consequently, APMs are 
used by the Directors and management 
for strategic and performance analysis, 
planning, reporting and reward setting. 

In order to show when such measures 
have been used, the APMs are 
highlighted in blue throughout the 
Executive Review. The APMs are 
adjusted profit, adjusted EBITDA, 
adjusted operating profit and 
adjusted EPS. The definitions of APMs 
used are listed below: 

•  Adjusted EPS – Fully diluted 
earnings per share before tax, 
exceptional items, acquisition 
amortisation and LTIP charges 
•  Adjusted profit – Profit before 

tax, exceptional items, acquisition 
amortisation and LTIP charges
•  Adjusted operating profit – Profit 
before interest, tax, exceptional 
items, acquisition amortisation and 
LTIP charges

•  Adjusted EBITDA – EBITDA before 
exceptional items and LTIP charges

Exceptional items
These include acquisition related costs 
and reorganisation and restructuring 
costs. These items are excluded 
to present the performance of the 
business in a consistent manner and in 
line with how the business is managed 
and measured on a day-to-day basis. 

28

They are typically gains or costs 
associated with events that are not 
considered to form part of the core 
operations, or are considered to be a 
‘non-recurring’ event (although they 
may span several accounting periods). 
Further detail can be seen in note 10 to 
the financial statements. 

Acquisition related costs
Costs directly associated with 
acquisitions, including legal and 
advisory fees on deals, form part of 
our reported results on an IFRS basis. 
These costs, however, in our view form 
part of the capital transaction and as 
they are not attributed to investment 
value under IFRS 3, they are excluded 
from our adjusted measures for the 
purposes of reporting underlying 
results. Similarly, where acquisitions 
have employee related payments 
(exclusive of LTIPs) which lock in and 
incentivise legacy talent, we have 
also excluded these costs. As these 
costs are employment linked, they are 
treated as an expense and form part 
of the IFRS results, however, as with 
transaction costs, we do not consider 
these to form part of the underlying 
results of the business. In accordance 
with IFRS 3, on acquisition, businesses 
need to be fair valued, which can result 
in an uplift to stock on hand relating to 
sales orders already attached to the 
acquired stock. This uplift will distort 
the margins associated with the stock, 
and typically unwinds quickly as stock 
is sold soon after acquisition. The 
unwind of the stock uplift is excluded 
from our adjusted results as we deem 
this to be a cost of the acquisition. 

Reorganisation and 
restructuring costs
In order to maximise efficiencies, 
as well as recognise synergies from 
acquisitions, certain projects are 
undertaken to achieve these. 

These are projects outside of the 
normal operations of the business 
and typically are very sizeable in terms 
of costs. This is particularly relevant 
during a large scale restructuring 
that can result in some disruption 
to the normal business (for example 
manufacturing patterns) leading to 
operational inefficiencies occurring in 
this time frame. If we deem this to be 
the case, we will present the details 
and associated costs of the projects 
separately in our financial statements 
and exclude them from our adjusted 
measures. 

LTIP costs
As part of our senior management 
remuneration, the Group operate a 
Long Term Incentive Plan (‘LTIP’) in 
the form of options for ordinary shares 
of the Group. In accordance with 
accounting principles, despite this plan 
not being a cash cost to the business, 
a share-based payments charge is 
taken to the income statement. We 
consider that these charges do not 
form part of the underlying operational 
costs and therefore exclude them from 
our adjusted measures. 

Acquisition amortisation costs
Under IFRS, as part of the acquisition 
of a company, it is necessary to 
identify intangible assets such as 
customer lists and brands which form 
part of the intangible value of the 
acquired business but are not part of 
the acquired balance sheet. These 
intangible assets are then amortised 
to the income statement over an 
appropriately judged period. These are 
not operational costs relating to the 
running of the acquired business and 
are directly related to the accounting 
for the acquisition. As such we exclude 
them from the underlying results of the 
business. 

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019Alternative performance measures

A full reconciliation between our adjusted and reported results is provided below: 

Adjusted EBITDA 

Exceptional items 

LTIP charges 

EBITDA 

Adjusted profit before tax 

Exceptional items 

Acquisition amortisation 

LTIP charges 

Reported profit before tax 

Adjusted profit after tax 

Exceptional items 

Acquisition amortisation 

LTIP charges 

Reported profit after tax 

Adjusted EPS 

Exceptional items (including tax effect) 

Acquisition amortisation (including tax effect) 

LTIP charges (including tax effect) 

Reported diluted EPS   

  31 March 2019  31 March 2018 
£m

£m 

Notes 

10 

25 

Notes 

10 

12 

25 

Notes 

23 

23 

23 

38.7  

(8.3) 

(3.0) 

27.4 

£m 

30.3  

(8.4) 

(1.6) 

(3.0) 

17.3  

£m 

23.2  

(6.4) 

(0.7) 

(2.8) 

13.3  

Pence 

29.3  

(8.6) 

(0.9) 

(3.8) 

16.0  

28.0 

0.5

(2.2)

26.3 

£m

21.8 

0.5

(0.4)

(2.2)

19.7 

£m

15.6 

0.8

(0.3)

(1.8)

14.3 

Pence

22.1 

1.4

(0.3)

(2.7)

20.5 

The APMs are also used in a number of the Group’s performance metrics detailed below:

•  Adjusted overheads – Selling expense, administration expense and other operating income excluding exceptional items, 

acquisition amortisation and LTIP charges

•  Adjusted operating margin – Adjusted operating profit divided by revenue
•  Cash conversion – Adjusted cash generated from operations divided by adjusted EBITDA
•  Return on capital employed – Adjusted operating profit divided by monthly average net capital employed  

(excluding cash and intangibles)

•  Average leverage – Average debt divided by adjusted EBITDA 
•  Dividend cover – Adjusted EPS divided by total dividends for the year
•  Interest cover – Adjusted finance charge divided by adjusted profit

29

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
EXECUTIVE REVIEW  
CONTINUED

Detailed financial review
The Group has delivered another excellent performance in the financial year to 31 March 2019. 

31 March  
2019 
£m 

448.4 

84.6 

(52.0) 

32.6 

7.3% 

(2.3) 

30.3 

(8.4) 

(1.6) 

(3.0) 

17.3 

(4.0) 

13.3 

31 March  
2018 
£m 

%  
change 

327.5 

70.0 

(46.8) 

23.2 

7.1%

(1.4) 

21.8 

0.5 

(0.4) 

(2.2) 

19.7 

(5.4) 

14.3 

37

21

11

41

67

39

(12)

(8)

£0.4 million) and an LTIP charge 
of £3.0 million (2018: £2.2 million). 
Adjusted profit after tax increased 
49% to £23.2 million (2018: £15.6 
million) with reported profit after 
tax for the year at £13.3 million (2018: 
£14.3 million).

Finance charge 
Finance costs at £2.3 million (excluding 
arrangement fees of £0.2 million 
relating to the additional facility to 
fund the Impact acquisition, which 
are included in exceptional costs 
below) compared to £1.4 million in the 
prior year. This reflects the increase 
in central banks’ base rates and the 
higher average debt of the Group 
following the acquisition of Impact. 
Adjusted interest cover was 14.1 
times in 2019, compared to 16.7 times 
in 2018 reflecting the additional cost of 
the debt for the Impact acquisition. 

Exceptional items 
The Group incurred exceptional costs 
in the year totalling £8.4 million (2018: 
exceptional gain of £0.5 million). 

The costs related to three items:

•  Acquisition of Impact (£2.4 million) 
– legal and due diligence fees and 
deferred employee related amounts 
associated with locking in and 
incentivising the legacy Impact team.

•  Restructure of our US operations 
(£5.6 million) – these include 
the costs for closure of our 
manufacturing facility in Midway 
and relocation of equipment and 
personnel to Impact’s manufacturing 
site in Memphis, Tennessee. Along 
with manufacturing inefficiencies 
associated with the start up of 
converting operations (including 
machine calibration and operator 
training). In addition the costs 
include redundancies and the sale 
of the Midway freehold property less 
associated costs. 

•  UK unification – £0.4 million of costs 
associated with relocating a part of 
our UK business to another site and 
associated redundancies with the 
move. 

The net cash outflow in the year 
associated with exceptional costs was 
£0.3 million, which includes the £4.8 
million cash inflow from the sale of our 
Midway site in Georgia.

LTIP charges 
LTIP charges have increased in the 
year to £3.0 million (2018: £2.2 million). 
The increase reflects the higher share 
price alongside an increase in the 
number of shares granted compared 
to the prior year. 

Revenue 

Gross profit 

Overheads 

Adjusted operating profit  

Adjusted operating margin % 

Finance charge 

Adjusted profit before tax  

Exceptional items 

Acquisition amortisation 

LTIP charges 

Profit before tax 

Tax 

Profit after tax 

Revenues for the year of £448.4 million 
have grown 37% over the previous 
year (2018: £327.5 million) of which 
9.8% relates to organic growth and the 
remainder as a result of the acquisition 
of Impact. At like-for-like foreign 
exchange rates the overall revenue 
increase is the same. Adjusted 
operating profit increased by 41% 
to £32.6 million (2018: £23.2 million) 
and 40% at like-for-like exchange 
rates. Adjusted operating profit 
margins increased to 7.3% (2018: 
7.1%) as we continue to focus on higher 
margin product categories along with 
increased efficiencies and a drive on 
cost management. Gross margins fell 
in the year, largely as a result of the 
effect of the acquisition of Impact and 
product mix to 18.9% (2018: 21.4%). 
Overheads as a percentage of revenue 
reduced to 11.7% compared to 14.4% 
in the prior year. 

Overall our adjusted profit before 
tax increased 39% in the year to 
£30.3 million (2018: £21.8 million) 
reflecting the strong performance of 
the business. Our reported profit 
before tax at £17.3 million (2018: 
£19.7 million) declined year-on-year 
reflecting the exceptional cost 
of £8.4 million (2018: exceptional 
gain £0.5 million), amortisation of 
assets acquired through business 
combinations of £1.6 million (2018: 

30

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
In 2019 over

60 million

units of Stationery and creative play  
products sold

31

EXECUTIVE REVIEW  
CONTINUED

Taxation 
The Group aims to manage its tax 
affairs in an open and transparent 
manner, including being fully compliant 
with all applicable rules and regulations 
in tax jurisdictions in which it operates. 
We have not entered into any tax 
avoidance or otherwise aggressive 
tax planning schemes and the Group 
continues to operate its tax affairs in 
this manner. 

The tax charge is £4.0 million 
compared to £5.4 million in the prior 
year. The year-on-year reduction is 
driven by the increased exceptional 
costs in the year, part of which are 
allowable for tax purposes. The 
effective tax rate on adjusted profits 
is 23.4% (2018: 28.4%). The reduction 

primarily reflects the impact of the 
lower US federal tax rate following the 
US tax reform in January 2018. Overall 
tax paid in comparison to the prior year 
increased slightly to £3.7 million (2018: 
£3.1 million) largely as a result of higher 
profitability in tax paying territories 
including Europe and Australia. 

Earnings per share 
Adjusted, fully diluted earnings 
per share grew 33% to 29.3p (2018: 
22.1p) reflecting the improved adjusted 
profitability of the business. Reported 
basic earnings per share are 16.0p 
(2018: 21.4p). 

Dividends
The Board is pleased to announce a 
final dividend of 6.00p (2018: 4.00p) 

bringing our total dividend in respect 
of the year to 8.50p per share, up 42% 
(2018: 6.00p). This represents 3.4 times 
dividend cover compared to 3.7 times 
in 2018. This improvement in pay-out 
is in line with our progressive dividend 
policy and our commitment of moving 
our dividend cover over time towards 
at least two and a half times adjusted 
earnings per share.

Return on capital employed
Improving the return on capital 
employed is one of our promises to the 
shareholders and in line with this each 
region has its own target to improve 
its return on capital employed. Overall, 
the Group saw the return on capital 
employed increase to 24.3% in 2019 
from 22.5% in 2018. 

Cash flow and net cash
At 31 March 2019, the net cash position has improved by £12.7 million to £17.1 million compared to the prior year at 
£4.4 million. This reflects the improved adjusted profit performance in the year, with adjusted EBITDA up 38% to 
£38.7 million (2018: £28.0 million) and strong net working capital inflows which together delivered an outstanding EBITDA 
to operating cash conversion of 130.5%. 

Adjusted EBITDA 

Change in trade and other receivables 

Change in inventory 

Change in creditors, provisions and accruals 

Adjusted cash generated from operations 

Exceptional items from operations 

LTIP 

Cash generated from operations 

Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment 

Net capital expenditure  

Business acquired 

Cash acquired with acquisition 

Tax paid 

Interest paid (including exceptional items) 

Dividends paid to non-controlling interests 

Equity dividends paid 

Proceeds from issue of share capital 

Other 

Movement in net cash   

Opening net cash 

Closing net cash 

32

31 March 
2019 
£000 

38.7  

25.6 

4.3  

(18.1)  

50.5  

(5.0) 

(0.7) 

44.8 

5.3 

(7.9) 

(66.8) 

1.2 

(3.7) 

(2.1) 

(1.1) 

(4.6) 

48.3 

(0.7) 

12.7 

4.4 

17.1 

31 March 
2018 
£000

28.0 

(9.1)

0.4 

3.3 

22.6 

(0.5)

(0.4)

21.7 

2.6 

(9.4)

(5.1)

—

(3.1)

(1.5)

(0.6)

(3.0)

0.1 

(0.3)

1.4 

3.0

4.4 

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Working capital 
The main driver for the working 
capital movements in the year was 
the Impact acquisition. We acquired 
Impact on 31 August 2018 at the 
peak of their working capital cycle 
when trade receivables, inventory and 
creditors were close to their highest 
annual level. As a result following 
acquisition the Group benefited from 
a net Impact related working capital 
inflow of £24.8 million as inventory 
was despatched and receivables were 
collected from customers, over and 
above funding the creditor payments. 
Excluding the cash inflow from the 
Impact acquisition there was a net 
working capital outflow of £13.0 million, 
reflecting the need for additional 
working capital to support the growth 
of the business year-on-year. 

In the ever-challenging retail 
environment it is even more important 
to ensure we actively track debtor days 
and credit rating profiles to ensure 
we mitigate our exposure to credit 
risk with regard to our debtors. As a 
result we kept bad debt write off to 
less that 0.1% of revenue (2018: 0.1%), 
a testament to our active credit risk 
management process.

Stock levels increased year-on-year, 
largely due to Impact, however 
excluding this, our UK and Europe 
businesses have built up stock levels 
earlier in the production cycle than 
normal to gain further efficiencies 
from our high-speed printing 
operations, and to mitigate against 
the potential risks to our supply chain 
relating to Brexit.

Capital expenditure
During the year we invested £7.9 million 
(2018: £9.4 million). The key projects 
include:

•  the acquisition of new converting 

lines in the Netherlands;

•  the introduction of a second bag 

machine in our UK factory to provide 
‘not-for-resale’ branded bags for 
retailers; and

•  a new ERP system in the US. 

There are also smaller capital projects 
that we have invested in throughout 
the year and in all cases we seek rapid 
payback from our investment and 
monitor projects closely both during 
implementation and then through the 
payback period to ensure we achieve 
the expected returns.

Impact acquisition and 
associated share capital issue
In August 2018 the Group acquired 
100% of the equity of Impact 
Innovations Inc. The deal completed for 
total consideration of $73.5 million on a 
cash and debt free basis representing 
a 4.9x adjusted EBITDA multiple 
with an additional working capital 
and other adjustment. In total, cash 
totalling £66.8 million was paid in the 
year for the business. The acquisition 
was funded using a combination of 
debt and an equity share placing. 
The net proceeds from the share 
issue were £48.3 million. Full details of 
the assets acquired, which included 
stock, customer lists and the Impact 
brand, can be found in note 31 to the 
consolidated financial statements. 

Average leverage and treasury
As our business is very seasonal in 
nature we spend a period of our year 
in a net debt position and therefore 
average leverage is the key measure 
the Group adopts in relation to debt. 
We seek to maintain our average 
leverage position in the range between 
1.0 times and 2.0 times over the long 
term. Average leverage for the year 
to 31 March 2019 was 1.3 times, 
down from 1.5 times in the prior year, 
demonstrating the continued focus on 
our balance sheet and working capital 
management throughout the year.

On 5 June 2019 we entered into a 
new three year Group facility with a 
club of five banks chosen to reflect 
and support the geographical spread 
of the Group. HSBC continue to be 
a significant partner and have been 
joined in the new facility by NatWest, 
BNP Paribas, Sun Trust and PNC.

The new Group facilities, which run to 
May 2022 comprise:

•  a revolving credit facility (‘RCF A’) 

of $80.0 million;

•  a further flexible RCF (‘RCF B’) with 
availability varying from month to 
month of up to £85.0 million. This 
RCF is flexed to meet our working 
capital requirements during those 
months when inventory is being built 
within our annual business cycle and 
is nil when not required minimising 
carry costs; and

•  the existing invoice financing 

arrangements in Hong Kong which 
will remain in place for a minimum 
of the first year.

In total, the available facilities at 
approximately £160 million are 
more than sufficient to cover our 
peak requirements. Being partially 
framed in US dollars they provide a 
hedge against currency movements. 
The facilities, which do not amortise 
with time, include an additional 
uncommitted amount to finance 
potential acquisitions.

33

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
New accounting standards
IFRS 16 ‘Leases’ is effective for 
accounting periods beginning on or 
after 1 January 2019. The Group plans 
on adopting the modified retrospective 
approach. The estimated impact to 
profit before tax for the 2020 financial 
year is a reduction of between £nil and 
£1.0 million. Non-current assets are 
expected to increase by £31.0 million 
and gross liabilities are expected to 
increase by £35.0 million. The Group 
has elected not to recognise right 
of use assets and lease liabilities for 
short-term leases or low-value assets 
and will continue to expense the lease 
payments associated with these leases 
on a straight-line basis over the term of 
the lease. 

Financial position and 
going concern basis
The Group’s net assets increased 
by £75.1 million to £175.6 million 
at 31 March 2019 (31 March 2018: 
£100.5 million).

The Directors acknowledge guidance 
issued by the Financial Reporting 
Council relating to going concern. 
The Directors consider it appropriate 
to prepare the consolidated financial 
statements on a going concern basis, 
as set out in note 1 to the consolidated 
financial statements.

Paul Fineman
Chief Executive Officer (CEO)

Giles Willits
Chief Financial Officer (CFO)

10 June 2019

EXECUTIVE REVIEW  
CONTINUED

Average leverage and treasury 
continued
There are financial covenants, tested 
quarterly, attached to the facilities as 
follows:

• 

• 

interest cover, being the ratio 
of earnings before interest, 
depreciation and amortisation to 
interest on a rolling twelve-month 
basis; and
leverage, being the ratio of debt 
to adjusted EBITDA on a rolling 
twelve-month basis.

There is a further covenant tested 
monthly in respect of the working 
capital ‘RCF B’ by which available 
asset cover must not fall below agreed 
levels relative to amounts drawn.

The Group currently has no interest 
rate hedges in place and elects to 
accept floating interest rates across 
a range of currencies. While we will 
keep this under review, our debt is 
at its lowest point in many years and 
is planned to fall further relative to 
profitability. While global rates are 
rising, they remain low and interest 
margins have further capacity to fall 
as leverage performance improves 
and we are therefore comfortable with 
this position.

Foreign exchange
The overall impact on revenue and 
profits from currency movements is 
not significant. However, we adopt an 
active hedging policy where required. 
In particular, cash flow hedging 
ensures further foreign exchange 
movements remain mitigated as far 
as possible. A reasonable proportion 
of this hedging is achieved through 
natural hedges whereby our purchases 
and sales in US dollars are offset. 
The balance of our hedging is achieved 
through forward exchange contracts 
and similar derivatives.

34

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019In 2019 over

10 million

‘Not-for-resale’ bags sold

35

PRINCIPAL RISKS AND UNCERTAINTIES

The Group actively monitors the risk related to its 
business and the environment in which it operates. 

Risk management approach
The Group’s continuing success is influenced by how 
well we understand and manage our risks, making risk 
management ever more important as part of the Group’s 
strategy. We have a risk management framework which 
helps us identify, assess and mitigate significant risks.

Every year we review our approach to the Group’s risk 
management framework, especially given the significant 
growth we have experienced over the previous few years. 

Our approach to risk management is bottom up, with each 
of our Business Units maintaining risk registers for their 
territories, identifying, monitoring and determining mitigation 
plans for the key risks in their businesses. These risks feed 
into the Group risk summary. 

Risk appetite
Risk appetite is an expression of the types and amount of 
risk that the Group is willing to take or accept to achieve its 
objectives. In determining our risk appetite, we ensure that it 
allows us to make consistent and informed decisions across 
the Group, whilst capturing all key and significant risks 
assessing them and managing them to within our tolerated 
levels of risk. 

Framework
The Group’s risk management framework determines an 
overall risk rating for each Business Unit which in turn 
governs the Business Unit’s place on the Group’s risk 
continuum. The continuum is a sliding scale from lower risk, 
to higher risk and the placing on this scale then focuses the 
Group on where the higher risks sit and prioritises additional 
mitigation strategies that may be required. 

Link to Group strategy
The risks we have identified as our key focus in 2019 and 
beyond can be seen in the next few pages. Where applicable 
we have also identified how these risks interact with our 
Group strategy.

Our risk management framework

The Board
•  Ownership and monitoring of risk management
•  Set objectives and risk appetite

Audit Committee
•  Responsible for advising the Board on risk exposures
•  Review of internal controls that help manage risks

Executive Committee
•  Management of key risks
•  Assessment of materiality of key risks

Business Units
• 

Identification, assessment and mitigation 
associated with key risks

•  Consider risk as part of decision making and 

management of external relationships

Group Risk Function
•  Monitoring and collation of risks and actions by 

management from across the Group
•  Review and oversight of the Group’s risk 

management process

Key

  Working with the winners

  Design & innovation

  Efficiency & scale

36

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019Risk

Mitigation

Change

Acquisitions 

Failure to identify potential 
acquisition opportunities 
or failing to successfully 
integrate an acquisition 
could affect our growth 
strategy

Maintain an active M&A pipeline and ongoing review of market 
opportunities

Operate strict evaluation criteria including using third party 
due-diligence professionals for technical areas

Appropriate and effective modelling and sensitivity analysis and risk 
evaluation along with synergy target analysis

Overseen by one or more senior management team members with 
regular reports to the Board

Engage third party integration specialist, as required, to support 
critical integration processes post acquisition

Increased

Increased risk following the 
significant acquisition of 
Impact

Pre-mitigation impact:
High

Post-mitigation impact:
Medium

Link to strategy: 

People 

Failure to recruit, develop 
and retain the right people 
could affect the Group’s 
ability to meet its strategic 
objectives

A focus on succession planning and building strong teams around 
key individuals in each Business Unit

Ensuring we review all aspects of executive and senior management 
remuneration and appropriate remuneration packages, alongside a 
standardised grading and benefits structure for all positions

Appropriate policies around hiring key team members focusing on 
qualifications and appropriate experience for the relevant role

A focus on management development to improve competencies 
across the business

Implementation of cross-learning programmes to ensure all senior 
management team understand other roles

Unchanged

Remains low risk with 
continued focus and further 
investment in our management 
teams

Pre-mitigation impact:
Medium

Post-mitigation impact:
Low

Link to strategy:

Competition

Loss of significant 
customers

Price erosion due to pricing 
from competitors

Customers going directly to 
our suppliers

Focus on design, product quality and service delivery 

Maintain a blended and diversified portfolio of products and 
customers, both by market segment and geography

Close management of costs and margin on a product-by-product 
basis

Continued investment in capital expenditure to drive improved 
efficiency to maintain a competitive advantage

Maintain close relationships with all of our key customers

Increased

Increased risk as retail 
environment becomes more 
challenging

Pre-mitigation impact:
High

Post-mitigation impact:
Medium

Link to strategy:

37

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019PRINCIPAL RISKS AND UNCERTAINTIES  
CONTINUED

Risk

Mitigation

Change

Margin erosion 

Cost inflation and price 
competition eroding 
margins on already low 
margin products

Seasonality and fashion 
driving inventory 
obsolescence

Investment in production facilities and continued monitoring and 
improving production processes to ensure they are as efficient as 
possible

Regular and careful review and management of product costings with 
senior management approval for lower margin products

Regular monitoring of inventory obsolescence ensuring the business 
has sufficient provisions

Monitor competitor activity and working closely with suppliers 
ensuring efficiently costed sourced product

Concept selling to boost margins

Unchanged

Ongoing investment in 
efficiency improvements 
offsetting commercial 
pricing pressures

Pre-mitigation impact:
High

Post-mitigation impact:
Medium

Link to strategy:

Policies and procedures to efficiently manage and safely maintain 
continuity of supply

Carefully selected suppliers whose performance is monitored closely 
with alternative routes of supply as back up

Regular supply chain audits along with internal audits of 
manufacturing facilities 

Group insurance policy for a range of operational risks

Leveraging our sourcing offices in Asia to manage and maintain 
supply relationships

Unchanged

Group wide insurance 
programme continues to 
provide effective cover 
alongside increased focus on 
managing robust supply chain

Business 
continuity and 
supply chain 
integrity

Disruption of manufacturing 
operations during peak 
season

Failure of suppliers to 
deliver

Problems with product 
quality or integrity of supply 
chain

Pre-mitigation impact:
Medium

Post-mitigation impact:
Low

Link to strategy:

Regular monitoring of the economic conditions in which we operate

Impact analysis and response plans for significant changes to trade 
agreements utilising external specialists where necessary

Brexit mitigation plans

Increased

Brexit and US tariffs on China 
sourced products increase risk 
for the Group

Economic 
uncertainty

Changes to international 
trade terms between core 
territories of operation 
having a significant effect 
in our main cost areas of 
raw materials, freight and 
people

Pre-mitigation impact:
High

Post-mitigation impact:
Medium

Link to strategy:

38

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019Risk

Customer 
default 

Significant customer default

Mitigation

Change

Tight credit control procedures, with regular review of credit limits

Insuring credit risk where possible

Close monitoring of debts and inventory levels taking provisions 
where required

Increased

Increasingly challenging 
retail environment

Link to strategy:

Unchanged

Ongoing management focus 
maintains effective hedge to 
currency risk where possible

Pre-mitigation impact:
High

Post-mitigation impact:
Medium

Natural hedges where possible across businesses as well as spot 
purchases, forward contracts and other similar instruments

Ensuring financing facilities have appropriate headroom to 
accommodate fluctuations in currencies

Currency 
exposure 

Purchases, sales and 
funding in a mixture of 
currencies

Translation of overseas 
businesses

Pre-mitigation impact:
High

Post-mitigation impact:
Medium

Link to strategy:

Governance and 
compliance

Non-compliance with legal 
and tax regulations in the 
jurisdictions in which we 
operate

Group Legal Counsel joined the Group this year to aid with managing 
the Group’s compliance

Specialist advisers in relevant jurisdictions used where appropriate 
and necessary

Outsourced internal audit function

Open dialogue with relevant parties (e.g. tax authorities)

Pre-mitigation impact:
Medium

Post-mitigation impact:
Low

Regular cash budgeting, forecasting and monitoring

Maintain borrowing lines with lending partners to a range of 
maturities sufficient to cover funding requirements

Working closely and transparently with our lending partners ensuring 
the cash flow cycle is understood and monitored by all parties 

Liquidity 
and treasury 
management

Failure to raise funds 
through debt or share 
issues

Loss of support from 
principal banking partners

Unchanged

Increased regulatory 
environment offset by new 
and improved governance

Link to strategy:

Unchanged

Ongoing focus on cash 
management supported by 
refinancing with banks on 
5 June 2019

Pre-mitigation impact:
High

Post-mitigation impact:
Medium

Link to strategy:

39

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019BOARD OF DIRECTORS

The Board is responsible for overseeing the management of 
the business and for ensuring high standards of corporate 
governance are maintained throughout the Group.

John Charlton
Non‑Executive Chairman

Date of appointment

John joined the Board in April 2010 and was 
appointed Chairman of the Board on 
7 September 2011. 

Experience

In his executive career, John was previously 
Senior Vice President International of 
American Greetings Corporation and Chief 
Executive of UK Greetings Ltd. He was also 
Chairman of Amscan International Ltd.

External  
appointments

John is Chairman of SA Greeting (Pty) Ltd, 
a South African company.

Skills

In‑depth knowledge of the 
international greetings, card, gift packaging, 
stationery and social expression gift market.

Committees

Paul Fineman
Chief Executive Officer

Date of appointment

Paul joined the Board in May 2005 as Chief 
Executive Officer of Anker International plc. 
He was appointed Group Managing Director 
in January 2008 and then appointed Group 
CEO in January 2009. 

Experience

Paul has over 40 years’ experience in the 
card, gift wrap and stationery industry 
having developed knowledge within his 
family’s business, Anker International, prior 
to its acquisition in 2005. He has led the 
transformation and growth of Design Group 
as CEO since 2009. Paul was awarded Chief 
Executive Officer of the Year by the Quoted 
Company Awards 2017.

Skills

Business and team development.

Innovation and entrepreneurship.

Giles Willits
Chief Financial Officer

Date of appointment

Giles joined the Board in January 2018.

Experience

Giles has more than 20 years’ experience 
in senior leadership and financial roles 
in multiple household name businesses. 
He was most recently the CFO of 
Entertainment One Ltd (LSE: ETO), having 
joined prior to its IPO on AIM in 2007. Giles 
was also formerly Director of Group Finance 
at J Sainsbury plc and Woolworths Group 
plc and qualified as a chartered accountant 
at PricewaterhouseCoopers.

External appointments

Giles sits on the Board of Shearwater Group 
plc as a Non‑Executive Director.

Skills

Particular skills and experience in M&A, 
as well as being a Chartered Accountant.

40

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019Anders Hedlund
Founder and Non‑Executive  
Deputy Chairman

Date of appointment

Anders was appointed as Nominee 
Non‑Executive Director in 2007.

Experience

Anders founded the Group in 1979 and was 
joint Chief Executive Officer of the Group 
until December 2007.

Lance Burn
Executive Director

Date of appointment

Lance joined the Board in October 2012.

Skills

Significant industry knowledge.

Experience

Lance has been Managing Director of IG 
Design Group UK Limited since 2009 and 
the Group’s subsidiary operation in China 
since 2011. Lance’s previous roles included 
directing businesses for Rank Hovis 
McDougall plc, Saint Gobain Solaglas UK 
and also international overseas‑based roles 
for PepsiCo International in Africa and India.

Skills

Managing businesses both in the UK and 
abroad across a number of industry sectors. 

Business integration and overseas 
operations.

Elaine Bond
Non‑Executive Director

Date of appointment

Elaine joined the Board as a Non‑Executive 
Director on 1 February 2012.

Experience

Elaine was previously Group Operations 
Director of UK Greetings Ltd, the UK 
subsidiary of American Greetings.

External appointments

Non‑Executive Director at Sandgate 
Systems Limited.

Audit Committee

Skills

Remuneration Committee

Operational skills and experience gained 
over many years in the card, gift wrap and 
stationery industry.

Nomination Committee

Committees

Chair

Mark Tentori
Non‑Executive Director

Date of appointment

Mark joined the Board as a Non‑Executive 
Director on 1 January 2016. 

Experience

Mark has held a number of CFO and COO 
roles in public and private companies 
operating in a wide range of sectors and 
geographic locations. These included 
CFO of Deb Group Ltd, United Coffee and 
LINPAC Group Ltd. Mark also spent ten 
years with PricewaterhouseCoopers where 
he qualified as a Chartered Accountant.

External appointments

Currently Portfolio Partner at Charterhouse 
Capital Partners LLP.

Skills

Wide experience in finance and a Chartered 
Accountant.

Committees

41

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019CHAIRMAN’S CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REVIEW

We are proud to celebrate a year 
of outstanding performance.

John Charlton
Chairman 

Dear Shareholder

We are delighted to be able to report 
a further year of excellent progress 
and a strong financial performance 
of our Group during the year ended 
31 March 2019. I am delighted that 
once again we have exceeded the 
goals that we set ourselves in terms 
of adjusted profit and adjusted 
earnings per share. Furthermore, 
we are particularly pleased with the 
excellent levels of cash generation 
that we have achieved, which have 
supported our increased level of capital 
expenditure to improve our efficiency, 
the acquisition of Impact Innovations in 
the US and an increased dividend. 

We again end the year being cash 
positive, with a further reduction in 
average leverage. 

We shall continue to put considerable 
effort into strengthening our position as 
one of the world’s leading designers, 
manufacturers, importers and 
distributors of each of the core product 
categories on which we focus.

The Board is focused on developing 
the Group for the long‑term benefit of 
all shareholders, with well‑informed 
and effective decision making. As part 
of this, the Board takes corporate 
governance seriously and, following 
updates to AIM Rule 26, adopted the 
QCA Corporate Governance Code in 
September 2018 (‘Code’).

Governance framework

I am pleased to share with you 
our governance structure and the 
improvements that have taken 
place over the past year. For ease, 
we have structured this to align with 
the principles of the Code. 

Finally, let me take this opportunity 
to thank our shareholders, customers, 
suppliers, bankers and advisers 
for their support and contributions 
to all our businesses. As always, we are 
very appreciative of the strong working 
relationship and partnership that 
we continue to enjoy with you.

John Charlton
Chairman, 10 June 2019

Gender

6  Male

1  Female

Board

Nomination 
Committee

Remuneration 
Committee

Audit 
Committee

Responsible for 
reviewing and 
recommending changes 
to the composition 
of the Board and its 
committees

Responsible for 
overseeing the 
remuneration strategy 
for the Group and 
remuneration policy 
for the Directors

Responsible 
for overseeing 
financial reporting, 
risk management, 
internal controls and 
external audit

Read the Committee 
report on page 54 
to 58

Read the Committee 
report on page 51 
to 53

Accountable to 
shareholders for 
sustainable financial 
performance 
and long‑term 
shareholder value

Executive 
Board

Consists of Business 
Unit Managing 
Directors responsible 
for the execution 
of the strategy, 
governance and 
business performance

1  Chair

Role

3  Executive Directors

3  Non-Executive 
  Directors

Length of
tenure

1  1-2 years

1  2-5 years

2  5-10 years

3  10+ years

42

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019Principle 1: 
Establish a strategy and business 
model which promote long-term 
value for shareholders 

Principle 2: 
Seek to understand and 
meet shareholder needs 
and expectations

The Group continues to operate under 
a governance structure, which is 
designed to be flexible and efficient in 
creating sustainable long‑term growth 
in shareholder value. 

This year has been particularly noteworthy with the Group, as part of the 
acquisition of Impact Innovations, Inc., raising c£50 million from investors to 
support the financing of the deal. This was significantly oversubscribed and 
a good indication of the strong relationship between the Company and its 
shareholders, both existing and new.

Our key focus is to continue to drive 
the Group forward and keep us 
reaching for the high standards and 
targets we set ourselves. We do this by 
leveraging our strengths and the many 
opportunities to grow in the market. 
Our strategy focuses on:

•  Working with the winners – 

increasing revenue through organic 
growth with both existing and new 
customers, suppliers and product 
areas.

•  Design and innovation – 

developing new opportunities in 
new channels and adjacent product 
categories while expanding our 
presence in the growing market for 
celebrating events throughout the 
year.

•  Efficiency and scale – driving 
margins through investments in 
processes and people; and pursuing 
accretive M&A opportunities 
focused on unlocking synergies 
through economies of scale and 
strengthening our ‘one‑stop‑shop’ 
position with customers.

Further detail on the Group’s strategy 
and business model, as well as the key 
challenges faced by the Company in 
achieving its goals, can be found on 
pages 36 to 39.

At the start of 2019 the Company appointed Canaccord as its Nomad and Broker. 
Canaccord has a wide international reach and is well placed to support the 
Group’s ambitions for growth in the future.

Our CEO and CFO have maintained regular contact with our institutional investors 
as can be seen in the timeline below:

Shareholder engagement calendar 2018/2019

18 April 2018

Trading update

24 April 2018

Investor day

4 May 2018

Regional investor roadshow

11 May 2018

Capital market day at our business in Wales

11‑20 June 2018

Preliminary results announcement  
followed by an investor roadshow

26 June 2018

Investor day

3 September 2018

Equity raise

5 September 2018

Annual General Meeting

14 September 2018 

Investor day

17 September 2018

Extraordinary General Meeting

27‑30 November 2018

Interim results announcement  
followed by an investor roadshow

8 January 2019

Appointment of new Nomad/Broker

22 January 2019

Trading update

24 January 2019

Investor day

30 January 2019

Capital market day at our business in Wales

1 February 2019

Investor day

26 March 2019

Capital market day at our business in Wales

27 March 2019

Investor day

Following investor meetings, the full Board receives feedback on the views and 
concerns of investors and regularly receives copies of investment reports from 
analysts.

43

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019CHAIRMAN’S CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REVIEW  
CONTINUED

Principle 2: continued
Seek to understand and 
meet shareholder needs and 
expectations

Principle 3: 
Take into account wider stakeholder 
and social responsibilities and their 
implications for long-term success

Individual investors
In addition to our focus on institutional 
investors, we aim to engage with 
individual and retail investors on a 
regular basis.

Our AGM gives us the ideal opportunity 
to meet with individual investors 
face‑to‑face. It is important that all 
investors have a platform to raise 
questions or make comments whilst 
also enabling us to give visibility of, 
and interaction with, the Board.

All our investors are regularly kept 
up‑to‑date with announcements, 
circulars, videos and reports, all of 
which are available on the Company’s 
website. In September 2018 we were 
proud recipients of a silver award at 
the Corporate & Financial Awards 
2018 in the category of ‘Best printed 
report: AIM/small cap’. The award was 
in recognition of our printed annual 
report and financial statements and is 
a testament to the Group’s efforts to 
communicate clearly and transparently 
with investors.

Nikky Geairns, is primarily 
responsible for shareholder liaison, 
and can be contacted at  
ngeairns@thedesigngroup.com. 
Contact details for the Company’s PR 
Advisers, Brokers and Registrars are 
also set out in the ‘Contact’ section of 
the Company’s website.

All of our stakeholders – our 
employees, customers, suppliers and 
communities – are vital to the success 
of the Group. 

Employees
We invest in our people; from training 
and education offered throughout the 
Group, through to opportunities for 
career progression. The Group offers 
an environment in which our employees 
are encouraged to grow and deliver 
their very best. It’s these same 
opportunities which allow the Group to 
attract and retain the brightest talent. 

Training
All our Business Units provide relevant 
and up‑to‑date training for employees. 
This year Australia invested in a new 
Workplace Compliance System which 
will see a move away from ad hoc 
training to a more structured training 
of awareness programme being 
utilised. Initially set up to provide key 
training of awareness in Bullying, 
Sexual Harassment, Equal Opportunity, 
Privacy and Social Media and the 
Internet, the system has the capability 
to include additional modules in the 
future. 

The Design Group Academy operating 
in our Celebrations business in Europe 
is a powerful tool to train employees in 
the skills needed for their roles, as well 
as rolling out key compliance initiatives. 
The purpose built classroom provides 
a relaxed and comfortable environment 
in which employees can focus on their 
learning away from their usual work 
stations. In addition, they operate 
a separate programme for sales 
managers the ‘Sales Improvement 
Group’. In its second year of a three 
year programme the key emphasis is 
coaching and is specifically targeted 
to the day‑to‑day issues which sales 
managers face. 

Talent 
Our Business Unit Managing Directors 
were recently asked as part of our 
succession planning to highlight who 
the ‘Stars of the Future’ are within their 
businesses and share the development 
plans in place that underpin their 
progress. The information will be 
reviewed bi‑annually by the Group’s 
Executive Committee. Consideration 
will be made as to what inter‑company/
Group‑wide experience could be given 
and will also highlight ‘gaps’ that may 
need filling within the organisation for 
the future.

In the UK we run a twelve month 
development programme in 
conjunction with an external provider 
for individuals who demonstrate 
the desire and capability for future 
promotion. This is a tailored training 
programme which also includes a 
dedicated mentor from the senior 
leadership team and one‑to‑one 
coaching.

44

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019Relations with shareholders

45

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019Information and feedbackOur Business Units use a variety of methods to enable effective two-way communication with employees. These range from semi-annual all-employee meetings (with web-ex facilities for remote team members) to smaller scale weekly catch ups. Comment boxes and staff surveys are also used and various alternatives in between. Local management in Australia catch up with the office and warehouse teams quarterly for pizza, service awards and a business review.We recently reviewed the methods by which we encourage our employees, worldwide, to raise feedback and concerns. We had a number of local country-based initiatives so knew our employees were able to speak up, however, we recognised the need for an independent telephone hotline enabling employees across the world to raise concerns confidently (and anonymously should they wish). This was rolled out at the end of March and we look forward to seeing how it is utilised over the coming year.EngagementThis year our Celebrations business in Europe redesigned its staff canteen providing comfortable seating, TV screens and table football to encourage employees to take breaks away from their desks and to mix across functions.Each location recognises birthdays and service anniversaries. The US holds employee picnics and monthly employee events often linked to key celebrations in that month e.g. Super Bowl in January, Valentine’s day in February. Similar events are held in Australia, teams within the business are tasked with running the special events which ensure that everyone is involved.CustomersThrough recognising that each of our customers is unique and so requires a different service to satisfy their needs and expectations, we work hard to build deep and lasting relationships with our customers.Highlights to note from the Americas: • Impact Innovations, Inc. was awarded ‘Supplier of the Year 2019 for Seasonal and Celebration’ by Walmart, an award which recognises outstanding service and performance. This was especially pleasing during a year of transition for Impact as they integrated into the Design Group, and recognises a cohesive team effort.• Due to the strength of our relationship with a major US retailer, we have been made a strategic partner and invited to participate in two key initiatives with them. In one of these initiatives, we are the only participant from the ‘Housewares’ department and just one of three suppliers involved. These initiatives demonstrate exceptional trust in our business and will lead to very close collaboration in supply chain efficiencies and in how to grow our business through innovation in all facets of serving the end consumer. CHAIRMAN’S CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REVIEW  
CONTINUED

Principle 3: continued
Take into account wider stakeholder 
and social responsibilities and their 
implications for long-term success

Principle 4: 
Embed effective risk management, 
considering both opportunities 
and threats, throughout the 
organisation

Customers continued
In addition we are keen to ensure 
that our products keep up with key 
developments in our markets. For 
example, following the news that 
Australia had legalised same‑sex 
marriage at the end of December 2017, 
our Australian business celebrated in 
2018 by launching Mr&Mr and Mrs&Mrs 
cards from its World Greetings brand.

Our businesses meet with our key 
suppliers regularly to maintain a regular 
open dialogue and to share priorities 
both from the Group’s perspective 
but also those of our suppliers. 
Our Purchasing Managers have daily 
interaction with our supplier base 
covering a variety of topics such as 
quality, service levels, sourcing of raw 
materials etc.

The Board has overall responsibility for 
the establishment and oversight of the 
Group’s risk management framework. 
The Group’s risk management 
systems, policies and procedures are 
established to identify and analyse 
the risks faced by the Group, to set 
appropriate risk limits and controls, 
and to monitor the risks and adherence 
to limits.

Suppliers
As detailed on page 17 in our social 
responsibility commentary, we are 
committed to engaging with our 
suppliers fairly and lawfully and that 
we source responsibly. We expect 
our supply base to do the same.

Risk management processes are 
reviewed regularly by the Audit 
Committee to reflect changes in 
market conditions and the Group’s 
activities. The Board’s oversight 
covers all controls, including financial, 
operational and compliance controls 
and general risk management. 
It is based principally on reviewing 
reports from management to consider 
whether significant risks are identified, 
evaluated, managed and controlled and 
whether any significant weaknesses 
are promptly remedied and indicate the 
need for more extensive monitoring.

In the past few months the Board and 
senior management have reviewed 
key policies which support risk 
management. These include the Code 
of Business Conduct, Anti‑bribery & 
Corruption policy and Whistleblowing. 
Updated versions have been rolled 
out to the senior management teams 
across the business, with a wider roll 
out planned to all employees in 2020.

Further detail on the principal risks 
faced by the Group and the mitigating 
actions taken in respect of those risks 
can be found on pages 36 to 39.

This year saw the creation of a new 
role, Global Procurement Managing 
Director. The intention is to develop our 
supply chain to be a more cohesive, 
transparent and joined up organisation, 
collaborating closely, where there are 
tangible Group benefits, sharing data, 
ideas, products and best practice, 
combined with a continued focus 
on driving country‑based success. 
An individual was appointed in 
February 2019, reporting to the Group’s 
Executive Committee, and their focus 
will include:

•  data quality, ease of access and 

transparency;

•  third party manufacturing base;
•  supplier on‑boarding;
•  managing Group business with 

suppliers; and

•  ensuring best practice and 

compliance across the supply chain.

Communities
Our businesses throughout the world 
undertake a variety of local initiatives 
to support their local communities 
and national charities. See our social 
responsibility section on page 17 for 
some examples.

Further detail on how our business 
model identifies the key resources and 
relationships on which the business 
relies can be found on page 7.

46

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019Independence
Anders Hedlund, who founded our 
Group, is a Nominee Non‑Executive 
Director. Anders Hedlund is considered 
not to be independent, because as 
founder, he has served on the Board 
since the Company’s inception, his 
family hold significant interests in the 
shareholding of the Company and he 
also fulfils a consultancy role within one 
of the Group’s businesses. As reported 
in the financial statements, there are 
also some related party transactions 
between certain of the subsidiaries 
within our Group and companies under 
the ultimate control of the Hedlund 
family.

Following a review by the Board, all of 
the other Non‑Executive Directors are 
considered to be independent.

Principle 6: 
Ensure that between them the 
Directors have the necessary 
up-to-date experience, skills 
and capabilities

The Board is kept informed on an 
ongoing basis by the Company 
Secretary about their duties and 
any update in relation to legal and 
governance requirements for the 
Group.

In addition, the Board has access to 
the Deloitte Academy which gives each 
Director (Executive and Non‑Executive) 
access to a wide‑ranging programme 
of technical briefings, education, 
bespoke training and peer‑to‑peer 
networking opportunities. This is a 
useful resource to ensure that they 
keep abreast of market trends in board 
governance, legislative reform and 
keep their skills up to date.

The Board is keen to obtain external, 
specialist advice when necessary. 
An example of this is when the 
Remuneration Committee recently 
appointed Deloitte LLP to provide 
remuneration advice in relation to 
employee benefit schemes.

Principle 5: 
Maintain the Board as a 
well-functioning, balanced team 
led by the Chair

The Board consists of three Executive 
Directors and four Non‑Executive 
Directors (including the Chairman). 
For the biographies of the Board see 
pages 40 and 41.

There were no changes to the 
composition of the Board during 
the year.

The Board met formally seven times 
during the 2019 financial year. All 
Directors were present. In addition 
the Board met for a strategy day, 
two separate days focused on M&A 
and carried out an in‑depth review of 
the 2020 budgets, annual operating 
plans and strategic objectives with 
the Executive Directors. Prior to the 
acquisition of Impact Innovations, 
Inc. the Board spent three days in 
Memphis, USA in August 2018 visiting 
the senior management, receiving 
presentations as to the company’s 
history and vision for the future and the 
proposed integration into the Group.

The Audit Committee met three times 
and the Remuneration Committee met 
four times, all were fully attended.

The Group appointed Joy Laws as 
Group General Counsel and Company 
Secretary in June 2018. She plays an 
important role in the governance and 
administration of the Group advising 
the Board on procedures, corporate 
governance, changes in legislation, 
strategy and decision making.

47

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019CHAIRMAN’S CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REVIEW  
CONTINUED

The Chairman concluded the 
evaluation by highlighting the mix 
of skills which exist on the Board. 
Key observations and actions arising 
from the evaluation were:

•  a reminder that the agenda 

should retain its strategic focus 
whilst empowering the Executive 
Committee to deliver the strategy; 
and

•  the members to look into training 

opportunities. 

The Nomination Committee is 
responsible for identifying and 
nominating, for the approval of 
the Board, candidates to fill Board 
vacancies as and when they arise 
as well as putting in place plans 
for succession for Directors and 
Senior Executives, in particular with 
respect to the Chairman and the 
CEO.

Principle 8: 
Promote a corporate culture that 
is based on ethical values and 
behaviours

The Board helps to promote a culture 
of respect, integrity, openness, honesty 
and fulfilment within each of the 
businesses in our Group. We believe 
strongly in these objectives and we 
endeavour to practise these in the 
way that we communicate with our 
customers, suppliers, shareholders, 
advisers and of course all our teams 
employed in the Group.

Our performance management 
systems and processes are designed 
to direct and influence behaviours. 
Our Senior Executives cascade our 
ethical values down throughout the 
wider organisation.

Feedback from all stakeholders in 
the business, as set out in Principle 
3, allows the Board to assess the 
state of its corporate culture, as well 
as performance against the Group’s 
internal targets.

This year we created a Group‑wide 
Code of Business Conduct in 
recognition of our growing size and the 
need for consistent behaviours across 
the Group. This has been rolled out to 
the senior management teams across 
the businesses with an all‑employee 
roll out to follow in the first quarter of 
the financial year ending March 2020.

The Board recognised that the 
principles contained in the Code of 
Business Conduct were underpinned 
by a set of values already present 
within the Group.

Principle 7: 
Evaluate Board performance based 
on clear and relevant objectives, 
seeking continuous improvement

In November 2018 the 
Remuneration Committee conducted 
a self‑assessment based on an 
external template which was adapted 
to incorporate the guidance contained 
in the QCA Remuneration Committee 
Guide. Members were asked to rate 
the performance of the Remuneration 
Committee based on their own 
perceptions of the committee as 
a whole. 

Topics covered were: a) roles and 
responsibilities; b) terms of reference 
and planning; c) meetings – content 
and running of; d) skill set of members; 
and e) shareholder interaction.

Responses were collated and reviewed 
and no significant concerns were 
raised.

In January 2019 the Board conducted 
a self‑assessment. The questionnaire 
was split into ten sections with each 
section based on the principles set 
out in the QCA Corporate Governance 
Code. There was an additional section 
allowing the Directors to give their 
thoughts on areas such as the main 
achievements of the Board over the 
previous three years, and the main 
strengths and weaknesses of the 
Board. Following completion of the 
questionnaire, the Chairman held 
one‑to‑one meetings with each 
Director and the Company Secretary.

48

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019The Group Values Statement is as 
follows:

Our Values

•  To strive for excellence in all we do
•  To behave ethically and with 

integrity

•  To focus on our customers and to 

‘go the extra mile’

•  To be open to feedback, ideas and 
to positive change and promote 
fulfilment and fun

•  To be good ‘citizens’ within our 

communities and take responsibility 
for our impact on our planet

•  To be innovative and entrepreneurial
•  To treat everyone with dignity and 

respect

•  To be a team that succeeds together 

and aims to be an ‘employer of 
choice’

And, for our corporate policies and 
practices to be consistent with these 
values.

We encourage our employees to get 
involved in local community initiatives – 
see pages 17 for some great examples.

Principle 9: 
Maintain governance structures 
and processes that are fit for 
purpose and support good 
decision-making by the Board

There is a distinct and defined division 
of responsibilities between the 
Chairman and the CEO.

The Chairman is primarily responsible 
for the effective working of the Board in 
conjunction with management, and the 
CEO is responsible for the operational 
management of the business and for 
the implementation of the strategy 
agreed by the Board.

The Board is responsible for setting 
the vision and strategy for the 
Company, working closely with the 
executive management team to deliver 
a successful business model for our 
shareholders and other stakeholders.

The Group Delegation of Authority 
policy sets out the matters that are 
reserved to the Board for approval. 
These include:

•  Matters relating to the Company’s 
legal purpose and position and its 
status as a public listed company;
•  Changes in governance, strategy 

and significant changes in internal 
controls; and

•  Significant financial or contractual 

commitments and decisions.
The Board has three committees – 
Remuneration, Audit and Nomination. 
Each of these committees comprises 
the Non‑Executive Chairman and 
our two independent Non‑Executive 
Directors; Elaine Bond and Mark 
Tentori. Elaine chairs the Remuneration 
Committee, Mark the Audit Committee, 
and John Charlton the Nomination 
Committee.

The Nomination Committee is 
responsible for filling Board vacancies, 
reviewing the Board composition and 
the roles of Board members.

The Audit Committee satisfies itself 
on the integrity of financial information 
and that controls and risk management 
systems within our businesses are 
robust and defensible. The Committee 
meets as required during the year and 
at least twice with the Group’s external 
auditor. Its role is to review the interim 
and final financial statements for 
approval by the Board, to ensure that 
operational and financial controls are 
functioning properly, and to provide 
the forum through which the Group’s 
external auditor reports to the Board. 
Further detail about the activities 
undertaken by the Audit Committee 
this year can be found on pages 51 
to 53.

The Remuneration Committee 
determines appropriate levels of 
remuneration and compensation for 
Executive Directors. The Committee 
meets as required during the year 
and is closely involved in agreeing 
the positions within our senior 
management team that should 
participate in our Long Term Incentive 
Plan (‘LTIP’), together with the level of 
awards. The Remuneration Committee 
is also responsible for agreeing 
the performance criteria for annual 
bonuses and LTIP for Executive 
Directors and senior management. 
Further detail about the activities 
undertaken by the Remuneration 
Committee this year can be found 
on pages 54 and 55. 

49

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019CHAIRMAN’S CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REVIEW  
CONTINUED

Principle 10: 
Communicate how the Company is governed 
and is performing by maintaining a dialogue with 
shareholders and other relevant stakeholders

During 2019, the Board (itself or via 
the Board committees) worked hard to 
strike that essential balance between 
achieving the Group’s short‑term 
objectives and longer‑term growth and 
development. Key activities included:

•  monitoring and review of the 

financial performance of the Group 
on an ongoing basis including 
capital expenditure proposals and 
significant projects;

•  review of the interim and annual 
results including supplementary 
papers;

•  review of the effectiveness of the 

Group’s internal financial controls, 
general internal controls and risk 
management systems;

•  monitoring and review of the 
effectiveness of the Business 
Assurance function;

•  overseeing the relationship with the 

external auditor;

•  approval of the strategy, three year 

plans and budget;

•  review of the Group risk register;
•  approval of changes to remuneration 
for Chairman, CEO and CEO direct 
reports;

•  approval of LTIP Scheme for  

2018‑21;

•  approval of annual bonus payments 

and targets for the following 
financial year;

•  appointing Joy Laws as Group 
General Counsel & Company 
Secretary; and

•  assessing and approving the 

acquisition of Impact Innovations, 
Inc.

Principle 9: continued
Maintain governance structures 
and processes that are fit for 
purpose and support good 
decision-making by the Board

The Terms of Reference for each 
committee were reviewed and updated 
this year and can be found on our 
website.

In addition to the main Board and 
committees, the Executive Committee 
was established in 2017. This consists 
of the Managing Directors of the main 
Group businesses across the world 
plus the Group CEO and Group CFO. 
It plays an important role in both 
feeding key matters to the Board to 
enable well‑informed decision making 
and cascading Board initiatives to the 
wider businesses. It meets four times 
a year to discuss matters such as 
agreeing policy guidelines for business 
divisions based on an approved Group 
strategy, recommending objectives 
and strategy for the Group, and 
ensuring the control, co‑ordination and 
monitoring within the Group of risk and 
internal controls, to name a few.

The Board keeps all aspects of 
corporate governance under review, 
with the governance framework 
developing further as the Group 
continues to grow.

50

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT

I am pleased to present our 
first Audit Committee report.

Mark Tentori
Chair of the Audit Committee

The Committee is made up of 
Non‑Executive Directors: me, as the 
Chair, with Elaine Bond and John 
Charlton. We regularly invite the CEO 
and CFO to attend our meetings as 
well as the external auditor (KPMG 
LLP). Over the year we all met on three 
occasions.

The Board is satisfied that I, 
as Chairman of the Committee, 
have recent and relevant financial 
experience. I am a chartered 
accountant, qualifying at PWC and 
am currently Portfolio Partner at 
Charterhouse Capital Partners LLP.

Dear Shareholder,

On behalf of the Board I am pleased to 
present the Audit Committee report for 
the year ending 31 March 2019. 

The role of the Audit Committee is 
to assist the Board in fulfilling its 
corporate governance responsibilities 
in relation to the Group’s financial 
reporting, internal control and risk 
management systems as well as 
internal and external audit functions. 
The Committee also provides advice 
to the Board as to whether the annual 
report and financial statements 
taken as a whole are fair, balanced 
and understandable and provide the 
necessary information for shareholders 
to assess the Company’s position and 
performance, business model and 
strategy.

The main duties of the Committee 
include: 

•  providing oversight and challenge 

to the financial reporting; 
•  ensuring the Group operates 

within the correct internal controls 
and adopts appropriate risk 
management systems; 

•  ensuring the Group has suitable 

arrangements and policies in place 
to prevent fraud, bribery and other 
compliance concerns (and to enable 
employees to report such matters); 

•  monitoring and reviewing the 

effectiveness of the Group’s Internal 
Audit (Business Assurance) function 
in the context of the Group’s overall 
risk management framework; and

•  overseeing the relationship with 

the external auditor including their 
appointment, remuneration, terms of 
engagement, and annual audit plan. 

The Terms of Reference set out the 
duties in more detail and can be found 
on our website. These were updated 
this year to reflect the adoption of 
the QCA Corporate Governance 
Code. This report highlights the key 
discussions, decisions and actions 
that have taken place this year.

Mark Tentori
Chair of the Audit Committee

10 June 2019

51

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT
CONTINUED

Key activities and actions 
over the year:
Financial statements
The Audit Committee reviewed and 
approved the unaudited interim 
financial statements for the period 
ending 30 September 2018 and the full 
year audited statements for the period 
ending 31 March 2019. In reviewing the 
financial statements the Committee 
considered reports from the Group 
finance function as well as the external 
auditor. 

Significant accounting matters
The significant reporting matters and 
judgements the Committee considered 
during the year included: 

1)  The acquisition accounting for 

Impact Innovations under IFRS 3 
Business Combinations, which 
has created both intangibles in 
relation to the customer lists, 
as well as goodwill. As part of 
our considerations this year, the 
carrying value of these, as well as 
already existing intangibles and 
goodwill, has been assessed to 
determine whether there is any 
impairment. The Committee has 
concluded, based on appropriate 
assumptions on future cash flows, 
discount rates used and long‑term 
growth rates, there is sufficient 
headroom available resulting in no 
impairment requirement. 

2)  The use of alternative performance 

3)  The adoption of new accounting 

measures (‘APMs’) to present 
adjusted profit alongside its 
statutory counterpart. This involved 
the exclusion of costs that are 
considered by the business to skew 
the reader of the financial accounts’ 
perception of the performance of 
the underlying business. 
These included costs that 
are considered to be material 
and exceptional in nature and 
share‑based payment costs 
(also known as LTIP costs) and 
the amortisation of acquisition 
intangibles. The Committee is 
satisfied that this is an appropriate 
approach, and gives a clear 
and more balanced view of the 
underlying performance. It is also 
comfortable that this is a consistent 
approach that the Group has 
adopted for a number of years in 
respect of exceptional and LTIP 
costs. Previously the acquisition 
amortisation relating to the Lang and 
Biscay acquisitions had not been 
excluded from our APMs, however, 
following the transformational 
acquisition of Impact this year, the 
APMs have been updated to exclude 
the amortisation of acquisition 
intangibles given this is now a 
significant charge. In addition, the 
rationale and explanations behind 
the use of APMs is clearly disclosed. 

standards and ensuring the Group’s 
compliance with the standards. 
This year the Group adopted two 
new accounting standards (IFRS 9 
and IFRS 15) neither of which has 
a material impact on the Group’s 
financial position. From 1 April 2019, 
IFRS 16 Leases will be adopted. 
As per the detail on page 79 of 
our accounting policies note, and 
as has been seen amongst all 
adopters, this is thought to have a 
significant impact for the Group. 
The Committee has reviewed and 
understood the approach taken in 
respect of the assessment of the 
impact of the standard and agree 
with the decision of the business 
in respect of the methodology 
of adoption being ‘modified 
retrospective’. 

Internal controls
The Committee continually reviews the 
effectiveness of the Group’s internal 
controls. As a decentralised business, 
our Business Units each have a finance 
function, who are responsible for 
determining their own processes and 
procedures, including financial controls 
and accounting policies. However, 
the Group function dictates a set of 
minimum financial controls that we 
expect all Business Units to adhere to, 
along with Group accounting policies 
that each Business Unit should be 
aligning to. This forms part of the 
Group’s financial control framework. 

52

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019Each Business Unit confirms, with 
every monthly accounts submission, 
that they are adhering to the minimum 
set of controls. Bi‑annually we also 
request a more comprehensive 
Self‑Assessment checklist to be 
completed by each Business Unit. 
This provides the Group finance 
function, and therefore the Committee, 
with comfort that appropriate financial 
controls are in place around the Group. 

To gain further comfort, although 
the Group does not have an internal 
audit function, we outsource this role 
to Mazars LLP (‘Mazars’). They have 
undertaken baseline control reviews 
around each of the Business Units 
(with the exception of Impact given 
its recent addition to the Group), 
identifying areas of weakness, that 
subsequently have been addressed 
with oversight from the Group function. 

This year has seen the commencement 
of an additional layer of review by 
the Group finance function, being 
detailed balance sheet and working 
capital reviews for each of the 
Business Units. The reviews have 
been onsite visits by the Group team, 
including understanding the Business 
Units’ approach to balance sheet 
reconciliations as well as a detailed 
review of the working capital process. 

Internal Audit/ 
Business Assurance
Mazars continue to operate our 
Business Assurance function, and this 
year the Mazars team carried out a 
series of Business Assurance reviews 
around different Business Units and 
reported back to the Committee on 
their findings. 

One such review was undertaken 
during the month of July and focused 
on IG Design Group Americas’ 
readiness for the planned ERP software 
implementation in October 2018. 
The review that was conducted was 
a very useful tool that helped support 
the project team’s alignment on key 
areas of risk and confirm there were 
no issues beyond those previously 
identified by the project team. It was 
also a good mechanism to ensure 
business expectations were set 
appropriately.

Code of Business Conduct 
and Anti‑bribery and 
Corruption Policy
In recognising the growing size and 
complexity of the Group, the Audit 
Committee oversaw the roll out of 
a Group‑wide Code of Business 
Conduct. This contains a shared set of 
principles which we all agree to follow 
and which underpin our operations, 
decision‑making and general conduct. 
This ensures that we are all focused on 
operating to the same standards and 
know what behaviours to expect from 
our colleagues across the world.

The Committee also took the 
opportunity to review and update 
the Group Anti‑bribery & Corruption 
Policy and the Whistleblowing Policy. 
The latter included the launch of a 
Group‑wide whistleblowing hotline 
complementing the subsidiaries’ 
existing employee‑reporting tools.

External audit
The Audit Committee monitors the 
Company’s relationship with the 
external auditor, KPMG, to ensure that 
external independence and objectivity 
are maintained. As part of its review 
the Committee monitors the provision 
of non‑audit services by the external 
auditor.

KPMG LLP have provided audit 
services to the Group since 2016. 
Following the end of this financial 
year, it was felt prudent in light of the 
Group’s growing size and complexity 
to re‑tender the external audit work 
to ensure the Group is getting the 
best service and value for money. 
The outcome of the tender will be 
notified to shareholders prior to 
the AGM.

53

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT  

This report sets out the 
remuneration of IG Design Group 
Directors for the year  
to March 2019.

Elaine Bond
Chair of the Remuneration Committee

Dear Shareholder,

On behalf of the Board I am pleased 
to present to you the Remuneration 
Committee’s report for the year ended 
31 March 2019.

The Committee is chaired by me and 
the other members are Mark Tentori 
and John Charlton. We met four times 
formally during the year, with full 
attendance by the members.

Part 1: Overview of the year – 
Chair statement
Company performance
As detailed in the strategic report, the 
Group has made significant progress 
and delivered strong results in the year. 
The key financial objectives were profit 
growth and the associated increase 
in earnings per share alongside cash 
generation.

As can be seen in the strategic report, 
the Group uses adjusted measures to 
review the underlying performance of 
the business and the Remuneration 
Committee also uses adjusted 
measures to determine the Executive 
Directors’ annual bonus along with 
the Long Term Incentive Plan (‘LTIP’)
performance criteria based off earnings 
per share growth over three years.

Decisions on remuneration 
taken during 2019

Annual bonus
The bonus opportunity for Executive 
Directors during the last year was 
based on the achievement of the 
following targets:

•  Group profit before tax, LTIP 
charges and Board approved 
exceptional items;
•  closing net cash; and
•  fully diluted earnings per share 

calculated before LTIP charges and 
Board approved exceptional items.

The level of bonuses is approved by 
the Remuneration Committee, which 
retains reasonable discretion over 
the level of pay‑out depending on the 
quality of the financial performance in 
achieving the result.

This year’s results for profit before tax, 
LTIP charges and Board approved 
exceptional items, net cash and 
earnings per share before LTIP charges 
and Board approved exceptional 
items will result in annual bonuses 
for the Executive Directors of 78% of 
the stretch award. See Part 3 for a full 
breakdown per Director.

54

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019Assistance to the Committee
During the period the Committee 
received input from the CEO, the 
CFO and the Company Secretary. 
In addition it engaged Deloitte LLP to 
provide remuneration advice in relation 
to the executive LTIP scheme.

Payments made to former 
Directors and payments for 
loss of office
No payments were made to former 
Directors during the year and no 
payments for loss of office were made.

The Committee believes the 
Group’s remuneration strategy, and 
the structures implementing that 
strategy, have contributed positively to 
maintaining the stable and motivated 
management team of the Group, who 
have continued to deliver consistently 
strong performances for shareholders.

Elaine Bond
Chair of Remuneration Committee

10 June 2019

For 2020, the Remuneration Committee 
has agreed the following increases in 
salary/fees:

•  Paul Fineman to £400k per annum 
reflecting the significant change 
in the size and scale of the Group 
following the acquisition of Impact 
Innovations Inc in August 2018;
•  Giles Willits to £325k per annum 

– this reflects an increase of £25k 
over what had been previously 
agreed in his contract, following a 
benchmarking exercise undertaken 
by Deloitte; and

•  Lance Burn to £240k per annum. 

This reflects his increased 
responsibilities for Far East sourcing 
and includes 2% inflation.

Other key activities of the 
Committee during the year
•  Reviewed and updated the 

Committee’s Terms of Reference 
to reflect the adoption of the QCA 
Corporate Governance Code

•  Undertook a self‑evaluation of the 

Committee. See page 48 for further 
detail

•  Reviewed and agreed bonus targets 

and bonus awards

•  Agreed LTIP scheme and LTIP 

awards

•  Reviewed and agreed the salary and 
benefits of the CEO and his direct 
reports

•  Reviewed the Business Expense 

Policy

•  Reviewed training requirements of 

committee members

•  Approved remuneration section 
of Company annual report and 
financial statements

LTIP awards 2018‑2021
In September 2018 provisional share 
awards totalling 133,579 shares 
were issued to 17 members of the 
leadership teams across the Group. 
The performance condition applied 
was compound annual growth rate 
(‘CAGR’) in fully diluted earnings per 
share (measured before LTIP charges 
and exceptional items). Vesting 
increases on a straight‑line basis and 
the full number of shares are issuable 
when the stretch target is met.

In November 2018, following a 
benchmarking analysis performed by 
Deloitte, the Remuneration Committee 
approved the introduction of a separate 
2018‑2021 award for the Executive 
Directors and two members of the 
Executive Committee. The performance 
condition was in line with the above 
award with the introduction of a ‘super 
stretch’ target (with an effective cap of 
1.5 as a multiplier on the whole award) 
and the requirement to hold the shares 
on vesting for a period of two years. 
For more details on the performance 
conditions of both awards see note 25.

In June 2019 the Remuneration 
Committee approved the vesting of the 
2016‑2019 LTIP awards. The results 
achieved by the Group for the three 
year period have met all of the stretch 
performance conditions so maximum 
awards have vested. 723,632 shares 
(after adjusting for the effect of 
dividends and leavers) vested.

Executive Director salary reviews
For 2019, the Remuneration Committee 
agreed an increase in salary for:

•  Giles Willits to £275k per annum 
from 1 April 2018, as per his 
employment contract; and 

•  Paul Fineman to £375k per annum 
from 1 April 2018. This reflected a 
benchmarking exercise completed 
by Deloitte.

•  Lance Burn to £231k per annum 

from 1 April 2018 reflecting a 2.5% 
cost of living increase.

55

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT  
CONTINUED

Part 2: Remuneration policy
Executive Directors
The Group’s remuneration policy is to ensure that the remuneration of Executive Directors is sufficiently competitive to 
enable the Group to retain and motivate existing Directors and attract high‑quality performers in the future. The Group aims 
to incentivise and reward its Executive Directors in a way that is consistent with the Group’s commercial objectives and to 
align the interests of the Directors with those of the shareholders. To achieve this, the Executive Directors’ total remuneration 
comprises both fixed remuneration and variable reward, the latter reflecting Company performance.

The five main components of the Executive Directors’ remuneration packages can be seen in the table below with a clear link 
to the Group’s business model and strategy:

Reward

Base salary

Link to business model  
and strategy

‘Working with the winners’ 
extends to our employees – 
recruiting Executive Directors 
with the level of skills, talent and 
experience needed to execute 
our strategy.

Annual bonus

LTIP

The annual bonus encourages 
individuals to actively support 
and engage with the delivery 
of the Group strategy, with pay 
out directly based on Group 
performance.

The primary purpose of the LTIP 
is to reward the individual for 
delivering the Group strategy and, 
in turn, increasing shareholder 
value.

Pension

Other benefits

To assist in the recruitment 
strategy by enabling Directors 
to make long term provisions for 
their future retirement.

The provision of additional 
benefits assists in the Group’s 
recruitment strategy and gives 
the employee comfort and 
assistance in carrying out their 
roles effectively. 

Operation and performance

Maximum opportunity

Salaries are based on a number 
of factors including:

•  the skills and experience of the 

individual;

•  the size, responsibilities and 

complexity of the role;
•  external market data; and
inter‑Group comparisons.
• 

The Remuneration Committee 
sets the performance measures 
and targets each year. Bonuses 
are paid in cash once the annual 
results have been audited and 
are subject to the approval of the 
Committee. 

LTIP awards are in the form 
of shares and are subject to 
performance conditions which 
are assessed over a three year 
period. The current performance 
condition is based on CAGR in 
fully diluted earnings per share 
(measured before LTIP charges 
and exceptional items).

Pensions are provided in line 
with market practice and relevant 
statutory requirements.

Benefits can include: Life 
assurance/private medical 
insurance/car allowance.

There is no maximum.

The maximum achievable is 
120% of base salary. 

For the CEO up to 175% 
of base salary and for the 
other Executive Directors 
up to 150% of base salary. 
Both then have an out 
performance element of up 
to 50% of the initial grant.

Up to 15% of base salary 
for the CEO. Up to 10% 
of base salary for other 
Executive Directors.

Not applicable.

56

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019Dilution of share capital by 
employee share plans
The Company monitors and has 
complied with dilution limits in its 
various share scheme rules. The 
Board retains the flexibility of using 
Employee Benefit Trusts to buy 
ordinary shares to mitigate future 
dilution.

Non‑Executive Directors
The Group’s remuneration policy in 
respect of Non‑Executive Directors 
is to pay annual fees which reflect 
the responsibilities and duties 
placed upon them, whilst also 
having regard to market practice.

The remuneration of the 
Non‑Executive Directors and of the 
Chairman is recommended by the 
Executive Directors and approved 
by the Remuneration Committee 
(with no Director being involved in 
any decision relating to their own 
remuneration).

Service contracts
The Executive Directors have service 
contracts which can be terminated 
by the Company with no greater than 
one year’s notice. 

Non‑Executive Directors do not 
have service contracts and their 
appointments may be terminated 
without compensation at any time. 

All Non‑Executive Directors have 
letters of appointment and their 
appointment and subsequent 
re‑appointment is subject to 
approval by shareholders.

2020
No additional significant changes to 
the remuneration policy are envisaged 
for 2020 however, the Remuneration 
Committee will continue to regularly 
review the policy to ensure it remains 
appropriate to the business.

Part 3: Annual report on remuneration
Directors’ remuneration(a)
The summary of Directors’ remuneration is as follows:

Remuneration 

Pension contribution 

Total remuneration 

Aggregate for all Directors 

Highest paid Director

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000 

 1,835  

 1,637  

 12  

 9  

1,847  

 1,646  

2019 
£000 

 716  

—  

 716  

2018  
£000

 678 

— 

 678 

The remuneration in respect of the year ended 31 March 2019 to the Directors, by individual, was as follows:

Year ended 31 March 2019  

Executive Directors 

Lance Burn 

Paul Fineman 

Giles Willits 

Total Executive 

Non‑Executive Directors

Elaine Bond 

John Charlton 

Anders Hedlund 

Mark Tentori 

Total Non‑Executive 

Total Directors 

(a)  Audited. 

Salary/fees 
£ 

Bonus 
£ 

Benefits(b) 

£ 

Subtotal 
£ 

Pension 
£ 

Total 
£

254,987 

25,000 

3,049 

283,036 

11,571 

294,607

 448,050  

 292,500  

 12,749  

 753,299  

314,500  

214,500 

 2,761  

 531,761  

—  

—  

753,299 

 531,761 

  1,017,537 

532,000 

18,559  1,568,096 

11,571  1,579,667 

40,192  

 76,242  

93,790  

 42,303  

252,527  

—  

—  

—  

—  

—  

 2,311  

 42,503  

 8,345  

 84,587  

 3,974  

 97,764  

—  

 42,303  

 14,630  

 267,157  

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

 42,503 

 84,587 

 97,764 

 42,303 

 267,157 

  1,270,064  

532,000 

33,189  1,835,253  

11,571  1,846,824

(b)  The benefits relate primarily to private health benefits.

The bonuses are the expected amounts based on the results for the current year and are expected to be paid in June/July 
2019 once the year‑end statutory accounts have been approved.

The highest paid Director is Paul Fineman (2018: Paul Fineman).

The Group operated a Group personal pension plan to which the Group contributed for one Director (2018: one) and provides 
death in service life assurance to the value of between four and six times pensionable salary.

An expense of £1,721,000 has been recognised in the year in respect of share‑based payments relating to Directors in 
respect of the Long Term Incentive Plan (2018: £1,353,000).

57

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT  
CONTINUED

Part 3: Annual report on remuneration continued

Directors’ remuneration(a) continued
The remuneration in respect of the year ended 31 March 2018 to the Directors, by individual, was as follows:

Year ended 31 March 2018 

Executive Directors 

Lance Burn 

Paul Fineman 

Anthony Lawrinson(c) 

Giles Willits(d) 

Total Executive 

Non‑Executive Directors 

Elaine Bond 

John Charlton 

Anders Hedlund 

Mark Tentori 

Total Non‑Executive 

Total Directors 

(a)  Audited.

Salary/fees 
£ 

Bonus 
£ 

Benefits(b) 

£ 

Subtotal 
£ 

Pension 
£ 

Total  

£

 251,318  

 120,000  

 2,680  

 373,998  

 9,031  

 383,029 

 384,800  

 275,200  

 17,701  

 677,701  

189,102  

—  

 4,731  

 193,833  

 78,506  

 53,750  

 412  

 132,668  

— 

— 

— 

 677,701 

 193,833 

 132,668 

903,726  

 448,950  

 25,524    1,378,200  

 9,031 

 1,387,231 

 39,212  

 74,382  

91,502  

 40,896  

 245,992  

—  

—  

—  

—  

—  

 1,979  

 41,191  

 7,183  

 81,565  

 3,284  

 94,786  

—  

 40,896  

 12,446  

 258,438  

—  

—  

— 

—  

—  

 41,191 

 81,565 

 94,786 

 40,896 

 258,438 

1,149,718  

 448,950  

 37,970    1,636,638  

 9,031    1,645,669 

(b)  The benefits relate primarily to private health benefits.

(c)  Anthony Lawrinson resigned on 31 December 2017.

(d)  Giles Willits was appointed on 2 January 2018.

Long Term Incentive Plan(a)
Annual awards to Executive Directors who served during the year are as follows:

Lance Burn 

Paul Fineman 

Giles Willits 

(a)  Audited. 

LTIP vested 
2014‑2017 

LTIP vested 
2015‑2018 

LTIP vested(b) 
2016‑2019 

LTIP not 
yet vested 
2017‑2020 

LTIP not  
yet vested  
2018‑2021

 133,678  

 192,963  

 111,882  

 62,296  

 108,264 

—  

—  

 312,916  

 226,791  

 132,442  

 204,675 

—  

—  

 172,454  

 128,654 

(b)  All of these formally vest on 5 June 2019 following the Remuneration and Audit Committees’ approval of the results for the year ended 31 March 2019.

No Directors exercised any options during the year. For further details including performance conditions see note 25.

Cumulative total shareholder return (dividend reinvested) vs. selected indices
The graph below shows the percentage change in total shareholder return for the last six years compared to the FTSE Small 
Cap, FTSE AIM All‑share and the FTSE AIM UK 50.

1400

1200

1000

800

600

400

200

0
Mar 13 Sep 13 Mar 14

+1000.8%

+69.7%
+58.1%
+35.3%

Sep 14 Mar 15 Sep 15 Mar 16 Sep 16 Mar 17 Sep 17 Mar 18 Sep 18 Mar 19

IG Design Group

FTSE Small Cap

FTSE AIM All-share

FTSE AIM UK 50

58

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
DIRECTORS’ REPORT  

The Directors present their annual 
report on the affairs of the Group, 
together with the financial statements 
and independent auditor’s report for 
the year ended 31 March 2019. 

Directors
The Directors of the Company 
during the period under review, and 
subsequently to the date of this report, 
were: 

•  Elaine Bond
•  Lance Burn
•  John Charlton
•  Paul Fineman
•  Anders Hedlund
•  Mark Tentori
•  Giles Willits

Results and dividends
Results for the year ended 
31 March 2019 are set out in the 
consolidated income statement 
on page 66. The Directors are 
recommending a final dividend of 
6.00p per share which, if approved 
at the AGM, will result in a full year 
dividend of 8.5p per share for 2019.

Articles of association
A copy of the full articles of association 
are available on request from the 
Company Secretary and are also 
available on the Group’s website  
www.thedesigngroup.com. 
Any amendments to the articles of 
association can only be made by a 
special resolution of the shareholders.

Share capital and substantial 
shareholders
Details of the issued share capital, 
together with details of the movements 
during the year, are shown in note 25 to 
the consolidated financial statements. 
The Company has one class of 
ordinary share which carry no right 
to fixed income. Each ordinary share 
carries the right to one vote at general 
meetings of the Company.

There are no specific restrictions on 
the size of a holding nor on the transfer 
of shares, which are both governed by 
the general provisions of the articles of 
association and prevailing legislation.

Details of share‑based payments 
are set out in note 25 to the financial 
statements and the Directors’ 
remuneration report. No person has 
any special rights or control over the 
Company’s share capital and all issued 
shares are fully paid.

Directors’ indemnities 
and Directors and officers’ 
liability insurance
The Company has purchased Directors’ 
and officers’ liability insurance during 
the year as allowed by the Company’s 
articles.

At 31 March 2019, the Company 
had been notified of the following 
substantial shareholders comprising 
3% or more of the issued ordinary 
share capital of the Company:

% of issued share capital

Hedlund family(a) 

Octopus 

Milton 

Schroders Plc 

BlackRock 

Close Brothers AM 

Polar Capital 

Paul Fineman(b) 

27.97%

8.15%

5.05%

4.52%

3.99%

3.97%

3.37%

3.25%

(a)  In addition to the Hedlund family’s beneficial 

interest set out above, the Hedlund family is also 
interested in a further 1,150,790 ordinary shares, 
representing a further 1.47% of the current issued 
share capital of the Company. These ordinary 
shares are held by West Coast Trust, a trust for the 
benefit of Anders Hedlund’s adult children, which 
holds 900,790 ordinary shares. In total the Hedlund 
family is interested in 22,818,994 ordinary shares, 
representing 29.12% of the current issued share 
capital of Company.

(b)  This includes a non‑beneficial interest in 174,608 

ordinary shares at 5p each.

Acquisition of the  
Company’s own shares
At the AGM held on 5 September 
2018, the Company was authorised in 
accordance with Section 701 of the Act 
to make market purchases (within the 
meaning of Section 693(4) of the Act) of 
up to 6,494,839 ordinary shares (being 
approximately 10% of the share capital) 
on such terms and in such manner as 
the Directors of the Company may from 
time to time determine. 

This authority was not used during the 
year or up to the date of this report. 
Shareholders will be asked to renew 
these authorities at the AGM as detailed 
in the next AGM notice. The Company 
held no treasury shares during the year.

Financial risk management
Details of the Directors’ assessment 
of the principal risks and uncertainties 
which could impact the business are 
outlined in the principal risks and 
uncertainties section on pages 36 
to 39. The Board manages internal 
risk through the ongoing review of 
the Group’s risk register and the 
Board manages external risk through 
monitoring of the economic and 
regulatory environment and market 
conditions.

Brexit
The Group continues to keep the 
potential implications of Brexit for the 
Group under review. The risk associated 
with Brexit is relatively limited for the 
Group as it is mainly applicable to our 
UK business which represents less 
than 30% of the Group. We consider 
the main impact on the Group will be 
the effect of Brexit on the strength 
of the sterling and FX rates. We have 
significant visibility of our supply chain 
and depending on the nature of the exit 
from the European Union will depend 
on the level of impact for us as a 
Group. We have workstreams in place 
and mitigation of the risks of Brexit 
are underway. We are currently fully 
prepared for a soft Brexit. A no deal 
Brexit will increase the overall impact on 
our UK business with the need to adjust 
to World Trade Organisation terms, 
however this is not expected to have 
a material effect on the Group.

Going concern
The Directors continue to adopt the 
going concern basis in preparing the 
annual report and financial statements. 
Further details are set out in note 1 to 
the consolidated financial statements. 

59

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
DIRECTORS’ REPORT  
CONTINUED

Post balance sheet events
See note 32 for details.

Political donations
No political donations were made during 
the period under review.

Health and safety
The Group is committed to maintaining 
high standards of health and safety in 
every area of the business.

It is the aim of the Group to exceed 
the requirements of health and safety 
legislation and we have established a 
health and safety co‑ordinator to ensure 
continuous improvement of health and 
safety across the Group.

Employees
The Group recognises the benefits 
of keeping employees informed on 
matters affecting them as employees 
and on the various factors affecting 
the performance of the Group. This is 
achieved through employee briefings 
that are held in most businesses at least 
twice a year and regular team briefings.

The Group conforms to current 
employment laws on the employment 
of disabled persons and, where we are 
informed of any employee disability, 
management makes all reasonable 
efforts to accommodate that employee’s 
requirements.

Directors’ interests
The Directors who held office during the year had the following direct interests in the ordinary shares of the Company:

Interest in ordinary shares at the end of the year 

Elaine Bond 

Lance Burn 

John Charlton(a) 

Paul Fineman(b) 

Anders Hedlund(c) 

Mark Tentori 

2019 

2018 

 19,301  

 15,816 

—  

— 

619,616  

 619,616 

  2,369,334    4,453,534 

488  

 488 

11,111   

 7,404 

Giles Willits 
In addition to the above holdings:
(a)  37,500 (2018: 37,500) shares are held by the wife of John Charlton.
(b)  Paul Fineman owns a non‑beneficial interest in 174,608 (2018: 174,608) ordinary shares of 5p each.
(c)  16,642,640 (2018: 17,142,640) and 5,275,116 (2018: 5,275,116) ordinary shares of 5p each are respectively registered in the names of AC Artistic Limited (‘Artistic’) and 

 93,573  

 93,573 

Malios Limited, companies incorporated in the British Virgin Islands, and under the ultimate control of the Hedlund family. In addition to the Hedlund family’s beneficial 
interest set out above, the Hedlund family also holds interests in a further 1,150,790 ordinary shares, representing a further 1.47% of the current issued share capital of 
the Company. These ordinary shares are held by West Coast Trust, a trust for the benefit of Anders Hedlund’s adult children, which holds 900,790 ordinary shares.  
In total the Hedlund family has interests in 22,818,994 ordinary shares, representing 29.12% of the current issued share capital of the Company.

Disclosure of information to the auditor
In the case of each Director in office at the date the Directors’ report is approved, the following applies:

•  the Director knows of no information, which would be relevant to the auditor for the purpose of their audit report, of which 

the auditor is not aware; and

•  the Director has taken all steps that he/she ought to have taken as a Director to make him/herself aware of any such information 

and to establish that the auditor is aware of it.

Approval of the strategic report and Directors’ report
The strategic report and Directors’ report were approved by the Board on 10 June 2019.

Joy Laws
Company Secretary

10 June 2019

60

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
STATEMENT OF DIRECTORS’ RESPONSIBILITIES 
IN RESPECT OF THE ANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The Directors are responsible for 
preparing the Annual Report and the 
Group and Parent Company financial 
statements in accordance with 
applicable law and regulations. 

Company law requires the Directors to 
prepare Group and Parent Company 
financial statements for each 
financial year. Under the AIM Rules 
of the London Stock Exchange they 
are required to prepare the Group 
financial statements in accordance 
with International Financial Reporting 
Standards as adopted by the European 
Union (IFRSs as adopted by the EU) and 
applicable law and they have elected to 
prepare the Parent Company financial 
statements in accordance with UK 
accounting standards and applicable 
law (UK Generally Accepted Accounting 
Practice), including FRS 102, the 
Financial Reporting Standard applicable 
in the UK and Republic of Ireland.

Under company law the Directors must 
not approve the financial statements 
unless they are satisfied that they give 
a true and fair view of the state of affairs 
of the Group and Parent Company and 
of their profit or loss for that period. 
In preparing each of the Group and 
Parent Company financial statements, 
the Directors are required to: 

•  select suitable accounting policies 
and then apply them consistently; 

•  make judgements and estimates 
that are reasonable, relevant, 
reliable and prudent; 

•  for the Group financial statements, 

state whether they have been 
prepared in accordance with IFRSs 
as adopted by the EU; 

•  for the Parent Company financial 

statements, state whether 
applicable UK accounting standards 
have been followed, subject to 
any material departures disclosed 
and explained in the financial 
statements; 

•  assess the Group and Parent 

Company’s ability to continue  
as a going concern, disclosing,  
as applicable, matters related to 
going concern; and 

•  use the going concern basis of 

accounting unless they either intend 
to liquidate the Group or the Parent 
Company or to cease operations,  
or have no realistic alternative but  
to do so. 

The Directors are responsible for 
keeping adequate accounting records 
that are sufficient to show and explain 
the Parent Company’s transactions and 
disclose with reasonable accuracy at 
any time the financial position of the 
Parent Company and enable them to 
ensure that its financial statements 
comply with the Companies Act 2006. 
They are responsible for such internal 
control as they determine is necessary 
to enable the preparation of financial 
statements that are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud or 
error, and have general responsibility 
for taking such steps as are reasonably 
open to them to safeguard the assets 
of the Group and to prevent and detect 
fraud and other irregularities. 

Under applicable law and regulations, 
the Directors are also responsible 
for preparing a strategic report and a 
Directors’ report that complies with 
that law and those regulations. 

The Directors are responsible for 
the maintenance and integrity of the 
corporate and financial information 
included on the Company’s website. 
Legislation in the UK governing the 
preparation and dissemination of 
financial statements may differ from 
legislation in other jurisdictions.

61

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT
TO THE MEMBERS OF IG DESIGN GROUP PLC

•  the parent Company financial 

statements have been properly 
prepared in accordance with UK 
accounting standards, including 
FRS 102 The Financial Reporting 
Standard applicable in the UK and 
Republic of Ireland; and 

•  the financial statements have been 
prepared in accordance with the 
requirements of the Companies 
Act 2006. 

Basis for opinion 
We conducted our audit in accordance 
with International Standards on 
Auditing (UK) (‘ISAs (UK)’) and 
applicable law. Our responsibilities 
are described below. We have 
fulfilled our ethical responsibilities 
under, and are independent of the 
Group in accordance with, UK ethical 
requirements including the FRC Ethical 
Standard as applied to listed entities. 
We believe that the audit evidence 
we have obtained is a sufficient and 
appropriate basis for our opinion. 

2 Key audit matters: our 
assessment of risks of 
material misstatement 
Key audit matters are those matters 
that, in our professional judgement, 
were of most significance in the audit 
of the financial statements and include 
the most significant assessed risks of 
material misstatement (whether or not 
due to fraud) identified by us, including 
those which had the greatest effect on: 
the overall audit strategy; the allocation 
of resources in the audit; and directing 
the efforts of the engagement team. 
These matters were addressed in the 
context of our audit of the financial 
statements as a whole, and in forming 
our opinion thereon, and we do not 
provide a separate opinion on these 
matters. In arriving at our audit opinion 
above, the key audit matters were as 
follows: 

1 Our opinion is unmodified 
We have audited the financial 
statements of IG Design Group plc 
(‘the Company’) for the year ended 
31 March 2019 which comprise the 
consolidated income statement, 
the consolidated statement of 
comprehensive income, the 
consolidated statement of changes 
in equity, the consolidated balance 
sheet, the consolidated cash flow 
statement, the company balance 
sheet, the company statement of 
changes in equity, the company 
cash flow statement and the related 
notes, including the accounting 
policies in note 1 to the consolidated 
financial statements and note 1 to the 
company financial statements. 

In our opinion: 

•  the financial statements give 
a true and fair view of the 
state of the Group’s and of the 
parent Company’s affairs as at 
31 March 2019 and of the Group’s 
profit for the year then ended; 
•  the Group financial statements 
have been properly prepared in 
accordance with International 
Financial Reporting Standards as 
adopted by the European Union; 

The risk

Our response

The impact of 
uncertainties due to 
the UK exiting the 
European Union on 
our audit 
New risk

Refer to page 38 
(principal risks and 
uncertainties) and 
page 59 (directors’ 
report) 

Unprecedented levels of uncertainty 
All audits assess and challenge the reasonableness 
of estimates, in particular the valuation of identified 
intangibles on acquisition of Impact Innovations Inc, the 
recoverability of parent Company investment below, and 
related disclosures and the appropriateness of the going 
concern basis of preparation of the financial statements. 
All of these depend on assessments of the future 
economic environment and the Group’s future prospects 
and performance. 

Brexit is one of the most significant economic events for 
the UK and at the date of this report its effects are subject 
to unprecedented levels of uncertainty of outcomes, with 
the full range of possible effects unknown. 

We developed a standardised firm-wide approach to the 
consideration of the uncertainties arising from Brexit in 
planning and performing our audits. 

Our procedures included: 

Our Brexit knowledge: We considered the directors’ 
assessment of Brexit-related sources of risk for the 
Group’s business and financial resources compared with 
our own understanding of the risks. We considered the 
directors’ plans to take action to mitigate the risks. 

Assessing transparency: As well as assessing individual 
disclosures as part of our procedures on going concern, 
we considered all of the Brexit related disclosures 
together, including those in the strategic report and the 
directors’ report, comparing the overall picture against 
our understanding of the risks. 

However, no audit should be expected to predict the 
unknowable factors or all possible future implications 
for a company and this is particularly the case in relation 
to Brexit. 

62

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019The risk

Revenue recognition
Risk vs 2018: tu

Refer to page 76 
(accounting policy) 
and page 82 (financial 
disclosures) 

Accounting application
The majority of the revenue of the Group is derived 
through the provision of goods to customers during 
the year. There is a risk of fraud relating to revenue 
recognised around the year end, which requires special 
audit consideration because of the nature of the risk 
and the potential for misstatement in relation to the 
completeness and accuracy of revenue. 

Identified intangibles 
on acquisition of 
Impact Innovations 
Inc 
New risk  
(£19.0 million)

Refer to page 74 and 
75 (accounting policy) 
and page 110 (financial 
disclosures) 

Forecast based valuation
On 31 August 2018, the Group acquired the entire share 
capital of Impact Innovations Inc for total consideration 
of £82.2 million. 

We identified the identification of intangible assets and 
the valuation of the customer relationships and the trade 
names intangible assets as a risk because of the inherent 
complexity due to the judgements and assumptions 
applied by the directors in assessing the fair value of 
the intangible asset, and because of the size of the 
acquisition. 

The effect of this matter is that, as part of our risk 
assessment, we determined that the valuation of 
intangible assets has a high degree of estimation 
uncertainty, with a potential range of reasonable 
outcomes greater than our materiality for the financial 
statements as a whole. 

Low risk, high value
The carrying amount of the parent Company’s 
investments in the subsidiary companies held at cost less 
impairment and the carrying amount of the intra-group 
debtor balance together represents 54.2% (2018: 81.4%) 
of the parent Company’s total assets. 

Their recoverability is not at a high risk of significant 
misstatement or subject to significant judgement. 
However, due to its materiality in the context of the parent 
Company financial statements, this is considered to be 
the area that had the greatest effect on our overall parent 
Company audit. 

Parent: 
Recoverability of 
parent Company 
investment in 
subsidiaries and 
intra group debtors 
Risk vs 2018: tu

(£72.5 million; 2018: 
£56.7 million) 

Refer to page 115 
(accounting policy) 
and page 119 (financial 
disclosures) 

Our response

Our procedures included:

Tests of detail:
Selected a sample of revenue transactions recognised 
close to the year end and agreeing them to proof of 
delivery in order to assess whether the revenue has been 
recognised in the appropriate period. 

Inspected a sample of credit notes raised post year end 
to determine whether they related to revenue recognised 
in the year. 

Our procedures included:

Our valuation expertise: Used our own valuation 
specialists to assess the appropriateness of the valuation 
methodology applied. 

Benchmarking assumptions: Compared the Group’s 
assumptions to externally derived data in relation to key 
inputs such as revenue growth rates, customer attrition 
rate and discount rates. 

Assessing transparency: Assessed whether the 
Group’s disclosures relating to the valuation of acquired 
intangibles are appropriate.

Our procedures included: 

Tests of detail: 
Compared the carrying amount of 100% of investments 
with the relevant subsidiaries draft balance sheet to 
identify whether their net assets, being an approximation 
of their minimum recoverable amount, were in excess 
of their carrying amount and assessing whether those 
subsidiaries have historically been profit-making. 

Assessing 91.7% of intra group debtors to identify, 
with reference to the relevant debtors’ draft balance 
sheet, whether they have a positive net asset value and 
therefore coverage of the debt owed, as well as assessing 
whether those debtor companies have historically been 
profit-making

Assessing subsidiary audits: 
Assessed the work performed by the subsidiary audit 
teams on all of those subsidiaries and considering the 
results of that work, on those subsidiaries’ profits and 
net assets. 

Comparing valuations: 
For the investments where the carrying amount exceeded 
the net asset value, compared the carrying amount of the 
investment with the expected value of the business based 
on a suitable multiple of the subsidiaries’ profit. 

63

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT CONTINUED
TO THE MEMBERS OF IG DESIGN GROUP PLC

3 Our application of materiality 
and an overview of the scope 
of our audit 
Materiality for the Group financial 
statements as a whole was set at 
£0.91 million, determined with reference 
to a benchmark of Group profit before 
tax normalised to exclude certain 
costs, of which materiality represents 
4.4%. The Group team performed 
procedures on the items excluded 
from normalised group profit before 
tax. In 2018 materiality for the Group 
financial statements as a whole was 
set at £0.8 million, determined in that 
year with reference to a benchmark of 
Group profit of £19.7 million, of which it 
represented 4.1%. 

Materiality for the parent Company 
financial statements as a whole was 
set at £0.85 million (2018: £0.70 million), 
determined with reference to a 
benchmark of Company net assets of 
£128.2 million (2018: £64.8 million), of 
which it represents 0.7% (2018: 1.1%). 

We agreed to report to the Audit 
Committee any corrected or 
uncorrected identified misstatements 
exceeding £45,500 (2018: £37,000), 
in addition to other identified 
misstatements that warranted 
reporting on qualitative grounds. 

Of the Group’s fourteen (2018: 
fourteen) reporting components, 
which includes the parent Company, 
we subjected ten (2018: eight) to full 
scope audits for Group purposes. 
The components within the scope of 
our work accounted for 96.1% (2018: 
88.9%) of total Group revenue, 92.9% 
(2018: 98.2%) of Group profit before 
tax and 98.2% (2018: 88.6%) of total 
Group net assets. The remaining 3.9% 
(2018: 11.1%) of total Group revenue, 
7.1% (2018: 1.8%) of Group profit 
before tax and 1.8% (2018: 11.4%) of 
total Group net assets is represented 
by four (2018: five plus one component 
where we performed specific risk 
procedures) reporting components, 
none of which individually represented 
more than 3% of any of total Group 

revenue, Group profit before tax or 
total Group assets. For these residual 
components, we performed analysis 
at an aggregated Group level to 
re-examine our assessment that there 
were no significant risks of material 
misstatement within these. 

The Group audit team instructed 
component auditors as to the 
significant areas to be covered, 
including the relevant risks detailed 
above and the information to be 
reported back. The Group audit team 
determined the component materialities, 
which ranged from £0.25 million to 
£0.48 million (2018: £0.2 million to 
£0.7 million), having regard to the mix of 
size and risk profile of the Group across 
the components. The work on five of the 
fourteen in scope components (2018: 
two of the fourteen components) was 
performed by component auditors, 
and the rest, including the audit of the 
parent Company, was performed by 
the Group team. 

The Group audit team visited seven 
(2018: eight) component locations 
subject to full scope audits to assess 
the audit risk and strategy. Telephone 
conference meetings were held with 
all component auditors on completion 
of the component audits where the 
audit findings were reported to the 
Group audit team in more detail, and 
any further work required by the Group 
audit team was then performed by the 
component auditor. 

4 We have nothing to report 
on going concern 
The directors have prepared the 
financial statements on the going 
concern basis as they do not intend to 
liquidate the Company or the Group or 
to cease their operations, and as they 
have concluded that the Company’s 
and the Group’s financial position 
means that this is realistic. They have 
also concluded that there are no 
material uncertainties that could have 
cast significant doubt over their ability 
to continue as a going concern for at 

least a year from the date of approval 
of the financial statements ("the going 
concern period"). 

Our responsibility is to conclude on 
the appropriateness of the directors’ 
conclusions and, had there been a 
material uncertainty related to going 
concern, to make reference to that in 
this audit report. However, as we cannot 
predict all future events or conditions 
and as subsequent events may result 
in outcomes that are inconsistent with 
judgements that were reasonable at 
the time they were made, the absence 
of reference to a material uncertainty in 
this auditor’s report is not a guarantee 
that the group or the parent Company 
will continue in operation. 

In our evaluation of the directors’ 
conclusions, we considered the 
inherent risks to the Group’s and 
parent Company’s business model 
and analysed how those risks might 
affect the Group’s and Company’s 
financial resources or ability to continue 
operations over the going concern 
period. The risk that we considered 
most likely to adversely affect the 
Group’s and parent Company’s 
available financial resources over this 
period was the impact of a significant 
business continuity issues affecting a 
number of the Group’s key customers.

As this was the risk that could 
potentially cast significant doubt on 
the Group's and the parent Company's 
ability to continue as a going concern, 
we considered sensitivities over the 
level of available financial resources 
indicated by the Group’s financial 
forecasts taking account of reasonably 
possible (but not unrealistic) adverse 
effects that could arise from these 
risks individually and collectively and 
evaluated the achievability of the 
actions the directors consider they 
would take to improve the position 
should the risks materialise. We 
also considered less predictable 
but realistic second order impacts, 
such as the impact of a disorderly 
Brexit and the erosion of customer 

64

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019or supplier confidence, which could 
result in a rapid reduction of available 
financial resources.

• 

in our opinion those reports have 
been prepared in accordance with 
the Companies Act 2006. 

Based on this work, we are required 
to report to you if we have concluded 
that the use of the going concern basis 
of accounting is inappropriate or there 
is an undisclosed material uncertainty 
that may cast significant doubt over the 
use of that basis for a period of at least 
a year from the date of approval of the 
financial statements. 

We have nothing to report in these 
respects, and we did not identify going 
concern as a key audit matter. 

5 We have nothing to report 
on the other information in the 
Annual Report 
The directors are responsible for 
the other information presented in 
the Annual Report together with the 
financial statements. Our opinion on 
the financial statements does not cover 
the other information and, accordingly, 
we do not express an audit opinion or, 
except as explicitly stated below, any 
form of assurance conclusion thereon. 

Our responsibility is to read the other 
information and, in doing so, consider 
whether, based on our financial 
statements audit work, the information 
therein is materially misstated 
or inconsistent with the financial 
statements or our audit knowledge. 
Based solely on that work we have not 
identified material misstatements in the 
other information. 

Strategic report and 
directors’ report 
Based solely on our work on the other 
information: 

•  we have not identified material 
misstatements in the strategic 
report and the directors’ report; 
in our opinion the information given 
in those reports for the financial 
year is consistent with the financial 
statements; and 

• 

6 We have nothing to report 
on the other matters on which 
we are required to report by 
exception 
Under the Companies Act 2006, we 
are required to report to you if, in our 
opinion: 

•  adequate accounting records 

have not been kept by the parent 
Company, or returns adequate for 
our audit have not been received 
from branches not visited by us; or 

•  the parent Company financial 

statements are not in agreement 
with the accounting records and 
returns; or 

•  certain disclosures of directors’ 

remuneration specified by law are 
not made; or 

•  we have not received all the 

information and explanations we 
require for our audit. 

We have nothing to report in these 
respects. 

7 Respective responsibilities 
Directors’ responsibilities 
As explained more fully in their 
statement set out on page 61, the 
directors are responsible for: the 
preparation of the financial statements 
including being satisfied that they 
give a true and fair view; such internal 
control as they determine is necessary 
to enable the preparation of financial 
statements that are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud 
or error; assessing the Group and 
parent Company’s ability to continue 
as a going concern, disclosing, 
as applicable, matters related to 
going concern; and using the going 
concern basis of accounting unless 
they either intend to liquidate the 
Group or the parent Company or to 
cease operations, or have no realistic 
alternative but to do so. 

Auditor’s responsibilities 
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable 
assurance about whether the financial 
statements as a whole are free from 
material misstatement, whether 
due to fraud or error, and to issue 
our opinion in an auditor’s report. 
Reasonable assurance is a high level 
of assurance, but does not guarantee 
that an audit conducted in accordance 
with ISAs (UK) will always detect a 
material misstatement when it exists. 
Misstatements can arise from fraud or 
error and are considered material if, 
individually or in aggregate, they could 
reasonably be expected to influence 
the economic decisions of users taken 
on the basis of the financial statements. 

A fuller description of our 
responsibilities is provided on the 
FRC’s website at www.frc.org.uk/
auditorsresponsibilities.

8 The purpose of our audit 
work and to whom we owe our 
responsibilities 
This report is made solely to the 
Company’s members, as a body, in 
accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 
of the Companies Act 2006. Our audit 
work has been undertaken so that we 
might state to the Company’s members 
those matters we are required to state 
to them in an auditor’s report and for 
no other purpose. To the fullest extent 
permitted by law, we do not accept 
or assume responsibility to anyone 
other than the Company and the 
Company’s members, as a body, for 
our audit work, for this report, or for the 
opinions we have formed. 

Peter Selvey  
(Senior Statutory Auditor) 
for and on behalf of KPMG LLP, 
Statutory Auditor 

Chartered Accountants  
Milton Keynes 
MK9 1NE

10 June 2019

65

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019Note 

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000

4 

448,362  

327,516 

(365,533) 

(257,532)

82,829  

69,984

(23,095) 

(20,005)

(40,596) 

(30,346)

620  

19,758  

(2,476) 

17,282  

(4,031) 

1,477 

21,110 

(1,392)

19,718 

(5,384)

13,251 

14,334 

7 

5 

8 

9 

11,925  

13,545 

1,326  

789 

10 

12 

25 

32,646  

23,199 

(8,274) 

(1,609) 

(3,005) 

19,758  

539 

(371)

(2,257)

21,110 

(2,318) 

(1,392)

10 

(158) 

—

(2,476) 

(1,392)

2019 

Diluted 
pence 

16.0  

Basic 
pence 

16.2  

2018

Diluted 
pence 

20.5  

Basic 
pence

21.1 

Note 

23 

CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

Revenue 

Cost of sales 

Gross profit 

Selling expenses 

Administration expenses 

Other operating income  

Operating profit 

Finance expenses 

Profit before tax 

Income tax charge 

Profit for the year 

Attributable to:

Owners of the Parent Company 

Non-controlling interests 

Operating profit analysed as: 

Adjusted operating profit 

Exceptional items 

Acquisition amortisation 

LTIP charges 

Operating profit 

Finance expenses analysed as: 

Adjusted finance expenses 

Exceptional items 

Finance expenses 

Earnings per ordinary share

Earnings per share 

66

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

Profit for the year 

Other comprehensive income: 

Exchange difference on translation of foreign operations (net of tax) 

Transfer to profit and loss on maturing cash flow hedges (net of tax) 

Net gain/(loss) on cash flow hedges (net of tax) 

Other comprehensive income for period, net of tax items which may  
be reclassified to profit and loss in subsequent periods 

Total comprehensive income for the year, net of tax 

Attributable to: 

Owners of the Parent Company 

Non-controlling interests 

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000

13,251  

14,334 

240 

27 

118 

(1,632)

(271)

(27)

385  

13,636  

(1,930)

12,404 

12,372  

12,001 

1,264  

403 

13,636  

12,404

67

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

At 31 March 2017 

Profit for the year 

Other comprehensive income 

Total comprehensive  
income for the year 

Equity-settled share-based 
payment (note 25) 

Tax on equity-settled  
share-based payments 

Options exercised (note 22) 

Equity dividends paid 

At 31 March 2018 

Profit for the year 

Share 
premium  
and capital  
redemption  
reserve 
£000 

Share 
capital 
£000 

Merger 
reserves 
£000 

Hedging 
reserves 
£000 

Translation 
reserve 
£000 

Retained  Shareholder 
equity 
earnings 
£000 
£000 

Non- 
controlling 
interest 
£000 

Total 
£000

 3,132  

 9,769  

 17,164  

 271  

 2,551  

 53,330  

 86,217  

 3,833  

 90,050 

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 13,545  

 13,545  

 789  

 14,334 

 (298) 

 (1,246) 

 —  

 (1,544) 

 (386) 

 (1,930)

 —  

 —  

 —  

 (298) 

 (1,246) 

 13,545  

 12,001  

 403  

 12,404 

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 1,677  

 1,677  

 —  

 1,677 

 —  

 62  

 —  

 —  

 46  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 3,194  

 9,815  

 17,164  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 (27) 

 —  

 145  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 (111) 

 (37) 

 (111) 

 71  

 —  

 —  

 (111)

 71 

 (3,000) 

 (3,000) 

 (575) 

 (3,575)

 1,305  

 65,404  

 96,855  

 3,661  

 100,516 

 —  

 11,925  

 11,925  

 1,326  

 13,251 

 302  

 —  

 447  

 (62) 

 385 

Other comprehensive income 

 —  

Total comprehensive  
income for the year 

Equity-settled share-based  
payment (note 25) 

Tax on equity-settled  
share-based payments 

Shares issued 

Recognition of non- 
controlling interest 

Disposal of minority interest 

Options exercised (note 22) 

Equity dividends paid 

 —  

 —  

 —  

 145  

302  

 11,925  

 12,372  

 1,264  

 13,636 

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 2,333  

 2,333  

 —  

 2,333 

 —  

 —  

 641  

 63,065  

 —  

 —  

 83  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 18  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 764  

 764  

 —  

 63,706  

 —  

 —  

 764 

 63,706 

 —  

 —  

 (72) 

 —  

 —  

 29  

 311  

 (110) 

 —  

 311 

 (110)

 29 

 (4,553) 

 (4,553) 

 (1,075) 

 (5,628)

At 31 March 2019 

 3,918  

 72,898  

 17,164  

 118  

 1,607  

 75,801  

 171,506  

 4,051  

 175,557

Merger reserve
The merger reserve comprises premium on shares issued in relation to business combinations. 

Capital redemption reserve
The capital redemption reserve comprises amounts transferred from retained earnings in relation to the redemption of 
preference shares. For ease of presentation, the amount of £1.34 million relating to the capital redemption reserve has been 
included within the column of share premium and capital redemption reserve in the balances at both the beginning and end 
of each year, with no movements during the year.

Hedging reserve
The hedging reserve comprises the effective portion of the cumulative net change in the fair value of cash flow hedging 
instruments related to hedged transactions that qualify for hedge accounting and have not yet matured.

Translation reserve
The translation reserve comprises all foreign currency differences arising from the translation of the financial statements 
of foreign operations.

Shareholders’ equity
Shareholders’ equity represents total equity attributable to owners of the Parent Company. 

68

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET 
AS AT 31 MARCH 2019

Non-current assets

Property, plant and equipment 

Intangible assets 

Deferred tax assets 

Total non-current assets 

Current assets 

Inventory 

Trade and other receivables 

Derivative financial assets 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Total current assets 

Total assets 

Equity 

Share capital 

Share premium 

Capital redemption reserve 

Reserves 

Retained earnings 

Equity attributable to owners of the Parent Company 

Non-controlling interests 

Total equity 

Non-current liabilities  

Loans and borrowings   

Deferred income 

Provisions 

Other financial liabilities  

Deferred tax liability 

Total non-current liabilities 

Current liabilities 

Loans and borrowings   

Deferred income 

Provisions 

Income tax payable 

Trade and other payables 

Other financial liabilities  

Total current liabilities 

Total liabilities 

Total equity and liabilities 

Note 

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

26 

16 

22 

17 

18 

19 

20 

13 

17 

18 

19 

21 

20 

4 

4 

39,835  

83,690  

3,610  

127,135  

69,571  

45,405  

129  

19,458  

35,499 

36,547 

2,663 

74,709 

49,311 

37,369 

113 

9,031 

134,563  

95,824 

261,698  

170,533 

3,918  

71,558  

1,340  

18,889  

75,801  

171,506  

4,051  

3,194 

8,475 

1,340 

18,442 

65,404 

96,855 

3,661 

175,557  

100,516 

1,421  

751  

2,671  

1,817  

692  

7,352 

953  

99  

1,090  

3,370  

58,563  

14,714  

3,781 

998 

894 

1,440 

373 

7,486 

894 

99 

429 

3,364 

38,757 

18,988 

78,789  

62,531 

86,141 

70,017 

261,698  

170,533 

These financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors on 10 June 2019 and were signed on its behalf by:

Paul Fineman 
Director 

Giles Willits
Director

The notes on pages 71 to 111 form part of the financial statements.

69

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CONSOLIDATED CASH FLOW STATEMENT 
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

Cash flows from operating activities 

Profit for the year 

Adjustments for: 

Depreciation  

Amortisation of intangible assets 

Impairment of goodwill   

Finance expenses 

Income tax charge 

Profit on sales of property, plant and equipment   

Loss on disposal of intangible fixed assets 

Equity-settled share-based payment 

Operating profit after adjustments for non-cash items 

Change in trade and other receivables 

Change in inventory 

Change in trade and other payables  

Change in provisions and deferred income 

Cash generated from operations   

Tax paid 

Interest and similar charges paid 

Net cash inflow from operating activities 

Cash flow from investing activities 

Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment 

Acquisition of businesses 

Cash acquired with acquisition 

Acquisition of intangible assets 

Acquisition of property, plant and equipment 

Receipt of government grants 

Net cash outflow from investing activities 

Cash flows from financing activities 

Proceeds from issue of share capital 

Repayment of secured borrowings 

Payment of finance lease liabilities 

New bank loans raised   

Loan arrangement fees  

Equity dividends paid 

Dividends paid to non-controlling interests 

Net cash inflow from financing activities 

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period 

Effect of exchange rate fluctuations on cash held  

Cash and cash equivalents at end of the period 

70

Note 

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000

13,251  

14,334 

11 

12 

12 

8 

9 

25 

5,328  

2,309  

—  

2,476  

4,031  

(6) 

331  

3,005  

30,725  

25,616  

6,508  

(17,949) 

(137) 

44,763  

(3,694) 

(2,053) 

39,016   

5,312  

31 

(66,809) 

12 

11 

1,208  

(2,190) 

(5,699) 

— 

4,345 

818 

36 

1,392 

5,384 

(1,953)

1 

2,257 

26,614 

(9,133)

819 

3,612 

(199)

21,713 

(3,099)

(1,483)

17,131 

2,596 

(5,145)

—

(1,377)

(7,992)

15 

(68,178) 

(11,903)

22 

48,348  

24 

(2,350) 

— 

— 

(30) 

(4,553) 

(1,075) 

40,340  

11,178  

9,031  

(751) 

16 

19,458  

71 

(165)

(46)

5,108 

(111)

(3,000)

(575)

1,282 

6,510 

2,743 

(222)

9,031

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

1 Accounting policies
IG Design Group plc (the ‘Company’) is 
a public limited company, incorporated 
and domiciled in England and Wales. 
The Company’s ordinary shares are 
listed on the Alternative Investment 
Market (‘AIM’).

These financial statements consolidate 
those of the Company and its 
subsidiaries (together referred to 
as the ‘Group’). 

The Group financial statements 
have been prepared and approved 
by the Directors in accordance with 
EU adopted International Financial 
Reporting Standards. 

The accounting policies set out below 
have, unless otherwise stated, been 
applied consistently to all periods 
presented in these Group financial 
statements. 

Judgements made by the Directors 
in the application of these accounting 
policies that have significant effect 
on the financial statements and 
estimates with a significant risk of 
material adjustment in the next year 
are discussed in the policies below.

Going concern basis
The financial statements have been 
prepared on the going concern basis. 

In forming their conclusion that the 
business is and will remain a going 
concern, the Directors have reviewed 
the budgets and forecasts prepared 
and sensitivity analysis thereon. 
The business is highly seasonal and 
this results in peak funding demands.

On 5 June 2019, to meet the funding 
requirements, the business has 
refinanced with a banking group 
comprising HSBC, NatWest, BNP 
Paribas, Sun Trust and PNC Bank as 
part of a three year deal.

After making enquiries, the Directors 
have a reasonable expectation that 
the Company and the Group have 
adequate resources to continue in 
operational existence for at least 
twelve months from the date of signing 
these financial statements. Thus, they 
continue to adopt the going concern 
basis of accounting in preparing the 
financial statements. 

Measurement convention
The financial statements are prepared 
on the historical cost basis except 
derivative financial instruments which 
are stated at their fair value.

Changes in accounting policies
The majority of the accounting 
policies adopted in the preparation 
of the financial statements are 
consistent with those followed in the 
preparation of the Group’s annual 
financial statements for the year ended 
31 March 2018 with the exception of 
IFRS 9 (Financial Instruments) and 
IFRS 15 (Revenue from Contracts 
with Customers) which were new 
accounting standards adopted 
for the first time in these financial 
statements with IFRS 15 being adopted 
retrospectively. Accounting policies 
have been updated to reflect the 
new standards although there was 
no material impact of adopting either 
standard. 

Basis of consolidation
Subsidiaries 
Subsidiaries are entities controlled by 
the Group. The Group considers all 
facts and circumstances in assessing 
whether it has the power to control 
the relevant activities of investee 
and to benefit from the results 
thereof, including rights arising from 
shareholder agreements, contractual 
arrangements and potential voting 
rights held by the Group. The financial 
statements of subsidiaries are included 
in the consolidated financial statements 
from the date that control commences 
to the date that control ceased.

Business combinations are accounted 
for using the acquisition method as at 
the date on which control is transferred 
to the Group. 

For acquisitions on or after 
1 January 2010, the Group measures 
goodwill at the acquisition date as:

•  the fair value of the consideration 

transferred; plus

•  the recognised amount of any 
non-controlling interests in the 
acquiree; plus
if the business combination is 
achieved in stages, the fair value 
of the existing equity interest in 
the acquiree; less

• 

•  the net recognised amount 
(generally fair value) of the 
identifiable assets acquired 
and liabilities assumed.

When the result is negative, 
a ‘bargain purchase’ gain is recognised 
immediately in the income statement.

Provisional fair values allocated at 
a reporting date are finalised within 
twelve months of the acquisition date.

Foreign currency translation
The consolidated financial 
statements are presented in pounds 
sterling, which is the Company’s 
functional currency and the Group’s 
presentational currency.

Transactions in foreign currencies are 
translated at the foreign exchange rate 
prevailing at the date of the transaction. 
Monetary assets and liabilities 
denominated in foreign currencies at 
the balance sheet date are translated at 
the foreign exchange rate prevailing at 
that date. Foreign exchange differences 
arising on translation are recognised 
in the income statement. 

71

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

1 Accounting policies continued
Foreign currency translation 
continued
The assets and liabilities of foreign 
operations, including goodwill and 
fair value adjustments arising on 
consolidation, are translated at foreign 
exchange rates prevailing at the 
balance sheet date. The revenues and 
expenses of foreign operations are 
translated at an average rate for the 
period where this rate approximates to 
the foreign exchange rates prevailing at 
the dates of the transactions. Exchange 
differences arising from this translation 
of foreign operations, and of related 
qualifying hedges, are taken directly 
to the translation reserve. They are 
released into the income statement 
upon disposal or loss of control and 
on maturity or disposal of the hedge, 
respectively.

Exchange differences arising from 
a monetary item receivable from or 
payable to a foreign operation, the 
settlement of which is neither planned 
nor likely in the foreseeable future, 
are considered to form part of a net 
investment in a foreign operation and 
are recognised in other comprehensive 
income in the translation reserve. 
The cumulative translation differences 
previously recognised in other 
comprehensive income (or where 
the foreign operation is part of a 
subsidiary, the parent’s interest in the 
cumulative translation differences) are 
released into the income statement 
upon disposal of the foreign operation 
or on loss of control of the subsidiary 
that includes the foreign operation.

Financial instruments (policy 
adopted from 1 April 2018)
(i) Recognition and initial 
measurement
Trade receivables are initially 
recognised when they are originated. 
All other financial assets and financial 
liabilities are initially recognised 
when the Company becomes a party 
to the contractual provisions of the 
instrument. A financial asset (unless 
it is a trade receivable without a 
significant financing component) or 
financial liability is initially measured at 
fair value, plus, for an item not at fair 
value through profit or loss (‘FVTPL’), 
transaction costs that are directly 
attributable to its acquisition or issue. 
A trade receivable without a significant 
financing component is initially 
measured at the transaction price less 
attributable transaction costs.

(ii) Classification and 
subsequent measurement
Financial assets
a) Classification

On initial recognition, a financial asset 
is classified as measured at amortised 
cost or FVTPL.

Financial assets are not reclassified 
subsequent to their initial recognition 
unless the Group changes its business 
model for managing financial assets in 
which case all affected financial assets 
are reclassified on the first day of the 
first reporting period following the 
change in the business model.

A financial asset is measured at 
amortised cost if it meets both of the 
following conditions:

• 

• 

it is held within a business model 
whose objective is to hold assets to 
collect contractual cash flows; and
its contractual terms give rise on 
specified dates to cash flows that 
are solely payments of principal and 
interest on the principal amount 
outstanding.

All financial assets not classified 
as measured at amortised cost are 
measured at FVTPL. This includes all 
derivative financial assets. Investments 
in subsidiaries are carried at cost less 
impairment in accordance with IFRS 9.

b) Subsequent measurement and 
gains and losses

Financial assets at FVTPL – these 
assets (other than derivatives 
designated as hedging instruments) 
are subsequently measured at fair 
value. Net gains and losses, including 
any interest or dividend income, are 
recognised in profit or loss. 

Financial assets at amortised cost 
– These assets are subsequently 
measured at amortised cost using 
the effective interest method. 
The amortised cost is reduced by 
impairment losses. Interest income, 
foreign exchange gains and losses and 
impairment are recognised in profit or 
loss. Any gain or loss on derecognition 
is recognised in profit or loss.

Classification of financial 
instruments issued by the Group
Financial liabilities are classified 
as measured at amortised cost or 
FVTPL. A financial liability is classified 
as at FVTPL if it is classified as 
held-for-trading, it is a derivative or 
it is designated as such on initial 
recognition. Financial liabilities at 
FVTPL are measured at fair value 
and net gains and losses, including 
any interest expense, are recognised 
in profit or loss. Other financial 
liabilities are subsequently measured 
at amortised cost using the effective 
interest method. Interest expense 
and foreign exchange gains and 
losses are recognised in profit or loss. 
Any gain or loss on derecognition is 
also recognised in profit or loss.

72

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019Trade and other receivables
The Group have trade receivables 
without significant financing 
components. These assets are 
recognised initially at transaction 
price less attributable transaction 
costs. Trade and other receivables 
are subsequently reviewed for 
recoverability and impairment with 
any losses taken to profit and loss 
immediately. If the arrangement 
constitutes a financing transaction, 
for example if payment is deferred 
beyond normal business terms, then 
it is measured at the present value 
of future payments discounted at 
a market rate of instrument for a 
similar debt instrument.

Trade and other payables
Trade and other payables are stated at 
their nominal value which is considered 
to be their fair value. Subsequent to 
initial recognition they are measured 
at amortised cost using the effective 
interest method.

Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents comprise 
cash balances. Bank overdrafts 
that are repayable on demand and 
form an integral part of the Group’s 
cash management are included 
as a component of cash and cash 
equivalents for the purposes of the 
cash flow statement.

Interest‑bearing borrowings
Interest-bearing borrowings are 
recognised initially at fair value 
less attributable transaction costs. 
Subsequent to initial recognition, 
interest-bearing borrowings are stated 
at amortised cost using the effective 
interest method.

Derivative financial instruments 
and hedging
Derivative financial instruments
Derivative financial instruments are 
recognised at fair value. The gain or 
loss on remeasurement to fair value is 
recognised immediately in the income 
statement. However, where derivatives 
qualify for hedge accounting, 
recognition of any resultant gain or 
loss depends on the nature of the 
item being hedged.

Cash flow hedges
Where a derivative financial instrument 
is designated as a hedge of the 
variability in cash flows of a recognised 
asset or liability, or a highly probable 
forecast transaction, the effective part 
of any gain or loss on the derivative 
financial instrument is recognised 
as other comprehensive income in 
the hedging reserve. Any ineffective 
portion of the hedge is recognised 
immediately in the income statement.

Amounts previously recognised in other 
comprehensive income are transferred 
to the income statement in the periods 
when the hedged item affects profit 
or loss (for instance when the forecast 
sale that is hedged takes place). 

When a hedging instrument expires or 
is sold, terminated or exercised, or the 
entity revokes designation of the hedge 
relationship but the hedged forecast 
transaction is still expected to occur, 
the cumulative gain or loss at that 
point remains in other comprehensive 
income and is recognised in 
accordance with the above policy when 
the transaction occurs. If the hedged 
transaction is no longer expected to 
take place, the cumulative unrealised 
gain or loss recognised in other 
comprehensive income is recognised 
in the income statement immediately.

Impairment of financial 
instruments
The Company recognises loss 
allowances for expected credit 
losses ('ECLs') on financial assets 
measured at amortised cost. The 
Company measures loss allowances 
at an amount equal to lifetime ECLs, 
except for other debt securities 
and bank balances for which 
credit risk (i.e. the risk of default 
occurring over the expected life of 
the financial instrument) has not 
increased significantly since initial 
recognition, which are measured as 
twelve-month ECLs. Loss allowances 
for trade receivables and contract 
assets are always measured at an 
amount equal to lifetime ECLs. When 
determining whether the credit risk 
of a financial asset has increased 
significantly since initial recognition 
and when estimating ECLs, the 
Company considers reasonable and 
supportable information that is relevant 
and available without undue cost or 
effort. This includes both quantitative 
and qualitative information and 
analysis, based on the Company’s 
historical experience and informed 
credit assessment and including 
forward-looking information. 

Lifetime ECLs are the ECLs that result 
from all possible default events over the 
expected life of a financial instrument. 
twelve-month ECLs are the portion of 
ECLs that result from default events 
that are possible within the twelve 
months after the reporting date (or a 
shorter period if the expected life of the 
instrument is less than twelve months). 
The maximum period considered 
when estimating ECLs is the maximum 
contractual period over which the 
Company is exposed to credit risk.

73

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

1 Accounting policies continued
Impairment of financial 
instruments continued
Measurement of ECLs
ECLs are a probability-weighted 
estimate of credit losses. Credit 
losses are measured as the present 
value of all cash shortfalls (i.e. the 
difference between the cash flows due 
to the entity in accordance with the 
contract and the cash flows that the 
Company expects to receive). ECLs are 
discounted at the effective interest rate 
of the financial asset.

Credit-impaired financial assets
At each reporting date, the Company 
assesses whether financial assets 
carried at amortised cost are 
credit-impaired. A financial asset is 
‘credit-impaired’ when one or more 
events that have a detrimental impact 
on the estimated future cash flows of 
the financial asset have occurred.

Write-offs
The gross carrying amount of a 
financial asset is written off (either 
partially or in full) to the extent that 
there is no realistic prospect of 
recovery.

Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment is stated 
at cost less accumulated depreciation 
and impairment losses.

Where separately identifiable parts 
of an item of property, plant and 
equipment have different useful lives, 
they are accounted for as separate 
items of property, plant and equipment.

Leases in which the Group assumes 
substantially all the risks and rewards 
of ownership of the leased asset are 
classified as finance leases. 

Where land and buildings are held 
under finance leases the accounting 
treatment of the land is considered 
separately from that of the buildings. 
Leased assets acquired by way of a 
finance lease are stated at an amount 
equal to the lower of their fair value and 
the present value of the minimum lease 
payments at inception of the lease, 
less accumulated depreciation and 
impairment losses. Lease payments 
are accounted for as described below.

Depreciation is charged to the income 
statement on a straight-line basis over 
the estimated useful lives of each 
part of an item of property, plant and 
equipment. The estimated useful lives 
are as follows:

•  freehold buildings 
leasehold land  
• 
and buildings  

•  plant and equipment 
•  fixtures and fittings 
•  motor vehicles 

25-30 years

life of lease
4-25 years
3-5 years
4 years

No depreciation is provided on 
freehold land.

Included within plant and machinery 
are assets with a range of depreciation 
rates. These rates are tailored to the 
nature of the assets to reflect their 
estimated useful lives.

Depreciation methods, useful lives and 
residual values are reviewed at each 
balance sheet date. 

Business combinations 
and goodwill
Subject to the transitional relief in 
IFRS 1, all business combinations 
are accounted for by applying the 
purchase method. Goodwill represents 
amounts arising on acquisition of 
subsidiaries. In respect of business 
acquisitions that have occurred since 
1 April 2006, goodwill represents the 
difference between the cost of the 
acquisition and the fair value of the net 
identifiable assets acquired. 

Identifiable intangibles are those which 
can be sold separately or which arise 
from legal rights regardless of whether 
those rights are separable.

Goodwill is stated at cost less any 
accumulated impairment losses. 
Goodwill is allocated to cash-generating 
units and is not amortised but is tested 
every half year for impairment.

In respect of acquisitions prior to 
1 April 2006, goodwill is included on 
the basis of its deemed cost, which 
represents the amount recorded under 
UK GAAP at that time which was 
broadly comparable save that only 
separable intangibles were recognised 
and goodwill was amortised. Goodwill 
written off to reserves under UK GAAP 
prior to 1998 has not been reinstated. 

If the cost of an acquisition is less 
than the fair value of the Group’s share 
of the net assets of the subsidiary 
acquired, the difference is recognised 
directly in the income statement.

Computer software
Computer software is capitalised at 
its initial cost and amortised over its 
useful life.

74

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019Other intangible assets
Expenditure on internally generated 
goodwill and brands is recognised in 
the income statement as an expense 
as incurred.

Other intangible assets that are 
acquired by the Group are stated at 
cost less accumulated amortisation 
and impairment losses.

Amortisation
Amortisation is charged to the income 
statement on a straight-line basis 
over the estimated useful lives of 
intangible assets unless such lives are 
indefinite. All other intangible assets 
are amortised from the date they are 
available for use. The estimated useful 
lives are as follows: 

•  Computer software 
•  Trade names 
•  Customer lists 

3-5 years
3-5 years
3-15 years

Amortisation charges are included 
under ‘administrative expenses’ in 
the income statement.

Inventories
Inventories are stated at the lower of 
cost and net realisable value. Cost 
is based on a weighted average and 
includes expenditure incurred in 
acquiring the inventories and bringing 
them to their existing location and 
condition. In the case of manufactured 
inventories and work in progress, 
cost includes an appropriate share 
of overheads based on normal 
operating capacity.

Impairment of non‑financial 
assets excluding inventories 
and deferred tax
The carrying amounts of the Group’s 
assets other than inventories and 
deferred tax assets are reviewed at 
each balance sheet date to determine 
whether there is any indication of 
impairment. If any such indication 
exists, the asset’s recoverable amount 
is estimated.

An impairment loss is recognised 
whenever the carrying amount of 
an asset or its cash-generating unit 
exceeds its recoverable amount. 
Impairment losses are recognised 
in the income statement.

Impairment losses recognised in 
respect of cash-generating units are 
allocated first to reduce the carrying 
amount of any goodwill allocated to 
cash-generating units and then to 
reduce the carrying amount of the 
other assets in the unit on a pro rata 
basis. A cash-generating unit is the 
smallest identifiable group of assets 
that generates cash inflows that are 
largely independent of the cash inflows 
from other assets or groups of assets.

The recoverable amount of the 
Group’s assets is the greater of their 
fair value less costs to sell and value 
in use. In assessing value in use, 
the estimated future cash flows are 
discounted to their present value using 
a pre-tax discount rate that reflects 
current market assessments of the 
time, value of money and the risks 
specific to the asset. 

For an asset that does not generate 
largely independent cash inflows, the 
recoverable amount is determined for 
the cash-generating unit to which the 
asset belongs.

An impairment in respect of goodwill 
is not reversed. In respect of other 
assets, an impairment is reversed 
when there is an indication that the 
impairment may no longer exist 
and there has been a change in the 
estimates used to determine the 
recoverable amount. An impairment 
is reversed only to the extent that 
the asset’s carrying amount does 
not exceed the carrying amount that 
would have been determined, net of 
depreciation or amortisation, if no 
impairment had been recognised.

Provisions
A provision is recognised in the 
balance sheet when the Group 
has a present legal or constructive 
obligation as a result of a past event 
and it is probable that an outflow of 
economic benefits will be required to 
settle the obligation. If the effect is 
material, provisions are determined by 
discounting the expected future cash 
flows at a pre-tax rate that reflects 
current market assessments of the time 
value of money and, where appropriate, 
the risks specific to the liability. Where 
discounting is used, the increase in the 
provision due to the passage of time is 
recognised as borrowing costs.

75

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

1 Accounting policies continued
Revenue recognition
During the year, as required by IFRS, 
a new accounting standard has 
been adopted retrospectively – IFRS 
15 Revenue from Contracts with 
Customers. This introduces the concept 
of a performance obligation which 
is effectively a written or unwritten 
contract for a good or a service. 

The Group recognise revenue on 
sales of Celebration, Stationery and 
creative play, Giftware and ‘Not-for-
resale’ consumable products across 
four geographical segments. Typically 
the products that we supply form the 
only performance obligations within a 
customer agreement, and although the 
Group can provide ancillary services 
such as merchandising, these are not 
separately identifiable obligations. 
Revenue recognised in respect of these 
obligations represents the amounts, 
net of discounts, allowances for volume 
and promotional rebates and other 
payments to customers (excluding 
value added tax) derived from the 
provision of goods and services to 
customers during the year.

Revenue is generated solely from 
contracts with customers and is 
measured based on the consideration 
specified in a contract with a customer. 
The Group recognises revenue when 
it transfers control over a good to a 
customer.

We evaluate our Revenue with 
customers based on the five-step 
model under IFRS 15 Revenue from 
Contracts with Customers: (1) identify 
the contract with the customer; (2) 
identify the performance obligations 
in the contract; (3) determine the 
transaction price; (4) allocate 
the transaction price to separate 
performance obligations; and (5) 
recognise revenues when (or as) each 
performance obligation is satisfied. 

Provisions are made for volume and 
promotional rebates where they have 
been agreed or are reasonably likely to 
arise, based upon actual and forecast 
sales. Revenue is only recognised 
when highly probable that a significant 
reversal in the amount of cumulative 
revenue will not be required. 

Where goods are sold on a sale 
or return basis, revenue is initially 
booked net of any expectation of the 
proportion that will be returned by the 
customer, which is based on historical 
experience. This is updated for the 
final value of returns on payment by 
the customer. Where goods are sold 
on a consignment basis, the revenue 
is booked when the goods have been 
sold by the customer.

The Group disaggregates its revenue 
across four geographical segments. 
Geographical information about 
revenues from external customers can 
be found in note 4. 

Government grants
Government grants for specific 
expenses are recognised in the 
profit and loss in the same period 
as the relevant expense or when 
there is reasonable assurance that 
the Company will comply with the 
conditions attached to it and that the 
grant will be received. Capital-based 
government grants (i.e. those relating 
to depreciable assets) are usually 
included within other financial liabilities 
in the balance sheet and recognised 
in profit or loss over the periods and in 
the proportions in which depreciation 
expense on those assets is recognised.

Supplier income
The Group does not have material 
retrospective supplier incentive 
arrangements, but where these do 
arise, they are recognised within cost 
of sales on an accruals basis as earned 
for each relevant supplier rebate. 

Expenses
Operating lease payments
Payments made and lease incentives 
received under operating leases are 
recognised in the income statement 
on a straight-line basis over the term 
of the lease. 

Finance lease payments
Minimum lease payments are 
apportioned between the finance 
charge and the reduction of the 
outstanding liability. The finance 
charge is allocated to each period 
during the lease term so as to produce 
a constant periodic rate of interest on 
the remaining balance of the liability.

Finance income and expenses
Finance expenses comprise interest 
payable, finance charges on finance 
leases, amortisation of capitalised 
fees, and unwinding of discounts 
on provisions.

Net movements in the fair value of 
derivatives which have not been 
designated as an effective hedge, 
and any ineffective portion of fair value 
movement on derivatives designated 
as a hedge are also included within 
finance income or expense.

Interest income and interest payable 
is recognised in the income statement 
as it accrues, using the effective 
interest method. 

Taxation
Tax on the profit or loss for the year 
comprises current and deferred 
tax. Tax is recognised in the income 
statement except to the extent that it 
relates to items recognised in other 
comprehensive income or directly in 
equity, in which case it is recognised in 
other comprehensive income or equity 
respectively.

76

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019Current tax is the expected tax 
payable on the taxable income for 
the year, using tax rates enacted or 
substantively enacted at the balance 
sheet date and any adjustment to tax 
payable in respect of previous years.

Deferred tax is provided on temporary 
differences between the carrying 
amounts of assets and liabilities for 
financial reporting purposes and the 
amounts used for taxation purposes. 

The following temporary differences 
are not provided for: the initial 
recognition of goodwill; the initial 
recognition of assets or liabilities 
that affect neither accounting nor 
taxable profit other than in a business 
combination; and differences relating 
to investments in subsidiaries to the 
extent that they will probably not 
reverse in the foreseeable future. 

The amount of deferred tax provided 
is based on the expected manner of 
realisation or settlement of the carrying 
amount of assets and liabilities, using 
tax rates enacted or substantively 
enacted at the balance sheet date.

A deferred tax asset is recognised only 
to the extent that it is probable that 
future taxable profits will be available 
against which the asset can be utilised. 

Dividend distribution
Final dividends to shareholders of 
IG Design Group plc are recognised 
as a liability in the period that they 
are approved by shareholders.

Employee benefits
Pensions
The Group operates a defined 
contribution personal pension scheme. 
The assets of this scheme are held 
separately from those of the Group 
in an independently administered 
fund. The pension charge represents 
contributions payable by the Group to 
the fund.

The Netherlands subsidiary operates 
an industrial defined benefit fund, 
based on average wages, that has 
an agreed maximum contribution. 
The pension fund is a multi-employer 
fund and there is no contractual or 
constructive obligation for charging 
the net defined benefit cost of the plan 
to participating entities other than 
an agreed maximum contribution for 
the period, that is shared between 
employer (4/7) and employees (3/7). 

The Dutch Government is not planning 
to make employers fund any deficits in 
industrial pension funds; accordingly 
the Group treats the scheme as a 
defined contribution scheme for 
disclosure purposes. The Group 
recognises a cost equal to its 
contributions payable for the period.

Share-based 
payment transactions
The cost of equity-settled transactions 
with employees is measured by 
reference to the fair value of the options 
at the date on which they are granted. 

The fair value is determined by using 
an appropriate pricing model. The fair 
value cost is then recognised over the 
vesting period, ending on the date on 
which the relevant employees become 
fully entitled to the award. 

The quantum of awards expected to 
vest and the relevant cost charged is 
reviewed annually such that at each 
balance sheet date the cumulative 
expense is the relevant share of the 
expected total cost, pro-rated across 
the vesting period. 

No expense is recognised for awards 
that are not expected to ultimately 
vest, for example due to an employee 
leaving or business performance 
targets not being met. The annual 
expense for equity settled transactions 
is recognised in the income statement 
with a corresponding entry in equity.

Social security charges 
on share-based incentives
Employer’s social security charges 
are accrued, where applicable, at a 
rate which management expects to be 
the prevailing rate when share-based 
incentives are exercised and is 
based on the latest market value of 
options expected to vest or having 
already vested.

Own shares held by 
Employee Benefit Trust
Transactions of the Group-sponsored 
‘International Greetings Employee 
Benefit Trust’ are included in the Group 
financial statements. In particular, the 
trust’s purchases and sales of shares in 
the Company are debited and credited 
directly to equity.

Borrowing costs
Borrowing costs directly attributable 
to the acquisition, construction or 
production of an asset that necessarily 
takes a substantial period of time to 
get ready for its intended use or sale 
are capitalised as part of the cost of 
the respective asset. Costs directly 
attributable to the arrangement of new 
borrowing facilities are included within 
the fair value of proceeds received and 
amortised over the life of the relevant 
facilities. Other borrowing costs which 
can include costs associated with 
the extension of existing facilities are 
expensed in the period they occur.

Borrowing costs consist of interest 
and other costs that an entity incurs 
in connection with the borrowing 
of funds.

77

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

1 Accounting policies continued
Use of non‑GAAP measures
These financial statements include 
alternative performance measures 
(‘APMs’) that are presented in addition 
to the standard GAAP metrics. 
The Directors believe that these 
APMs provide important additional 
information regarding the underlying 
performance of the business including 
trends, performance and position of 
the Group. APMs are used to enhance 
the comparability of information 
between reporting periods and 
segmental business units by adjusting 
for exceptional or uncontrollable 
factors which affect IFRS measures, to 
aid the understanding of the Group’s 
performance. Consequently, APMs are 
used by the Directors and management 
for strategic and performance analysis, 
planning, reporting and reward setting. 
The APMs are adjusted profit, adjusted 
EBITDA, adjusted operating profit and 
adjusted EPS. The adjustments made 
to these adjusted results are: 

Exceptional items
These include acquisition related costs 
and reorganisation and restructuring 
costs. These items are excluded 
to present the performance of the 
business in a consistent manner 
and in line with how the business is 
managed and measured on a day-to-
day basis. They are typically gains or 
costs associated with events that are 
not considered to form part of the core 
operations, or are considered to be a 
‘non-recurring’ event (although they 
may span several accounting periods). 
Further detail can be seen in note 10 to 
the financial statements. 

Acquisition related costs
Costs directly associated with 
acquisitions, including legal and 
advisory fees on deals, form part of 
our reported results on an IFRS basis. 
These costs however, in our view, form 
part of the capital transaction, and as 
they are not attributed to investment 
value under IFRS 3, they are excluded 
from our adjusted measures for the 
purposes of reporting underlying 
results. Similarly, where acquisitions 
have employee related payments 
(exclusive of LTIPs) which lock in and 
incentivise legacy talent, we have 
also excluded these costs. As these 
costs are employment linked, they are 
treated as an expense and form part 
of the IFRS results, however, as with 
transaction costs, we do not consider 
these to form part of the underlying 
results of the business. In accordance 
with IFRS 3, on acquisition, businesses 
need to be fair valued, which can result 
in an uplift to stock on hand relating to 
sales orders already attached to the 
acquired stock. This uplift will distort 
the margins associated with the stock, 
and typically unwinds quickly as stock 
is sold soon after acquisition. The 
unwind of the stock uplift is excluded 
from our adjusted results as we deem 
this to be a cost of the acquisition. 

Reorganisation and 
restructuring costs
In order to maximise efficiencies as 
well as recognise synergies from 
acquisitions, certain projects are 
undertaken to achieve these. 

These are projects outside of the 
normal operations of the business and 
typically are very sizeable in terms 
of costs. This is particularly relevant 
during a large scale restructuring 
that can result in some disruption 
to the normal business (for example 
manufacturing patterns) leading to 
operational inefficiencies occurring in 
this time frame. 

If we deem this to be the case, we will 
present the details and associated 
costs of the projects separately in our 
financial statements and exclude them 
from our adjusted measures.

IFRS 2 (LTIP) costs
As part of our senior management 
remuneration, the Group operate a 
Long Term Incentive Plan (‘LTIP’) in 
the form of options for ordinary shares 
of the Group. In accordance with 
accounting principles, despite this plan 
not being a cash cost to the business, 
a share-based payments charge is 
taken to the income statement. We 
consider that these charges do not 
form part of the underlying operational 
costs and therefore exclude them from 
our adjusted measures. 

Acquisition amortisation costs
Under IFRS, as part of the acquisition 
of a company, it is necessary to 
identify intangible assets such as 
customer lists and brand which form 
part of the intangible value of the 
acquired business but are not part of 
the acquired balance sheet. These 
intangible assets are then amortised 
to the income statement over an 
appropriately judged period. These are 
not operational costs relating to the 
running of the acquired business and 
are directly related to the accounting 
for the acquisition. As such we exclude 
them from the underlying results of 
the business. 2019 is the first year that 
these costs have been included given 
the significant acquisition of Impact 
Innovations, Inc.

Like‑for‑like comparators
Figures quoted at like-for-like exchange 
rates are calculated by retranslating the 
previous year’s figures at the current 
year’s exchange rates.

78

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019The Group plans on adopting the 
modified retrospective approach. 
The estimated impact to profit before 
tax for the 2020 financial year is 
a reduction of between £nil and 
£1.0 million. Non-current assets are 
expected to increase by £31.0 million 
and gross liabilities are expected to 
increase by £35.0 million. The Group 
has elected not to recognise right 
of use assets and lease liabilities for 
short-term leases or low-value assets 
and will continue to expense the lease 
payments associated with these leases 
on a straight-line basis over the term of 
the lease. 

New standards and 
interpretations not applied
Management continually reviews the 
impact of newly published standards 
and amendments and considers, 
where applicable, disclosure of their 
impact on the Group. At the date of 
the authorisation of these financial 
statements, the following standards 
and interpretations that are relevant 
to the Group, which have not been 
applied in these financial statements, 
were in issue but not yet effective.

New or amended EU endorsed 
accounting standards
The Group has adopted IFRS 
15 Revenue from Contracts with 
Customers from 1 April 2018. The 
standard has not had a material effect 
on the Group’s financial statements.

The Group has adopted IFRS 9 
Financial Instruments. The standard 
sets out a single impairment model 
to ensure expected credit losses 
on financial instruments are always 
recognised as soon as they are 
forecast. 

The Group has assessed the credit 
risk around the financial instruments 
and expected credit losses under 
IFRS 9 compared the credit loss 
provisioning method formerly used 
under IAS 39 Financial Instruments: 
Recognition and Measurement and 
has not found a material difference. 
As a result prior year balances have not 
been restated and there has been no 
material impact on the Group’s Income 
statement, Balance sheet and Cash 
flow statement.

New accounting standards 
not yet adopted
IFRS 16 Leases
IFRS 16 Leases is effective for annual 
reporting periods beginning on or after 
1 January 2019 and replaces IAS 17 
Leases. The Group will adopt IFRS 
16 from 1 April 2019. For lessees, the 
new standard requires leases to be 
recognised on the balance sheet as 
a right-of-use asset (representing the 
right to use the leased item) and a 
liability, representing the obligation to 
make future lease payments. Under 
IFRS 16, the operating lease expense 
will be replaced with a depreciation 
charge for the right-of-use asset and 
interest expense on the lease liability.

New and amended accounting standards endorsed by the EU 

IFRS 16 Leases 

IFRIC 23 Uncertainty over Income Tax Treatments 

Prepayment features with Negative Compensation (Amendments to IFRS 9) 

Long-term Interests in Associates and Joint Ventures (Amendments to IAS 28)  

Annual Improvements to IFRSs 2015-2017 Cycle  
(Amendments to IFRSs 3 & 11, IASs 12 & 23)  

Effective date 

  1 Jan 2019 

  1 Jan 2019 

  1 Jan 2019 

  1 Jan 2019 

To be adopted 
by the Group

  1 Apr 2019

  1 Apr 2019

  1 Apr 2019

  1 Apr 2019

  1 Jan 2019 

  1 Apr 2019

No other standards, interpretations or amendments, other than IFRS 16, which have been issued but are not yet effective 
are expected to significantly impact the Group’s results or assets and liabilities and are not expected to require significant 
disclosure.

79

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

Provision for slow  
moving inventory
The Group has guidelines for providing 
for inventory which may be sold 
below cost due to its age or condition. 
Directors assess the inventory at 
each location and in some cases 
decide that there are specific reasons 
to provide more than the guideline 
levels, or less if there are specific 
action plans in place which mean the 
guideline provision level is not required. 
Determining the level of inventory 
provision requires an estimation of 
likely future realisable value of the 
inventory in various time frames and 
comparing with the cost of holding 
stock for those time frames. Regular 
monitoring of stock levels, the ageing 
of stock and the level of the provision 
is carried out by the Directors. Details 
of inventory carrying values are 
provided in note 14. At the year end 
the Group has provisions of £8,827,000 
(2018: £7,757,000) over the total 
inventory value.

2 Critical accounting 
judgements and key sources 
of estimation uncertainty
In the application of the Group’s 
accounting policies, which are 
described in note 1, the Directors 
are required to make judgements, 
estimates and assumptions about 
the carrying amounts of assets and 
liabilities that are not readily apparent 
from other sources. The estimates and 
associated assumptions are based on 
historical experience and other factors, 
including expectations of future events 
that are believed to be reasonable 
under the circumstances. Actual results 
may differ from these estimates. 

The estimates and underlying 
assumptions are reviewed on an 
ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting 
estimates are recognised in the period 
in which the estimate is revised if the 
revision only affects that period or 
in the period of revision and future 
periods if the revision affects both 
current and future periods.

The estimates and assumptions that 
have had a significant bearing on the 
financial statements in the current 
year or could have a significant risk 
of causing a material adjustment to 
the carrying amounts of assets and 
liabilities within the next financial year 
are discussed below.

Critical judgements in applying 
the Group’s accounting policies
The following are the critical 
judgements that the Directors have 
made in the process of applying the 
Group’s accounting policies and that 
have the most significant effect on the 
amounts recognised in the financial 
statements.

Consolidation of less than 
100% owned subsidiaries
Where the Company owns less than 
100% of the share capital and voting 
rights of Group companies, the 
decision of whether or not the investee 
should be treated as a subsidiary 
and consolidated in full in the Group 
accounts requires judgement. 
Management consider the individual 
facts and circumstances relating to the 
ability to control and benefit from the 
risks and rewards of investee trading in 
determining the appropriate treatment, 
which is then adopted consistently and 
reviewed annually for any changes in 
these facts and circumstances.

Key sources of  
estimation uncertainty
There are no key assumptions 
concerning the future, and other key 
sources of estimation uncertainty 
at the balance sheet date, that have 
significant risk of causing a material 
adjustment to the carrying amount 
of assets and liabilities within the 
next financial year. Other sources of 
estimation uncertainty are discussed 
in the strategic report and below. 

80

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019Since the acquisition of Impact 
Innovations, Inc. the Group now 
has a second China factory (wholly 
owned) and Asian procurement which 
form part of Impact’s operations and 
therefore is included in the overall 
US segment. 

Inter-segment pricing is determined on 
an arm’s length basis. Segment results 
include items directly attributable to a 
segment as well as those that can be 
allocated on a reasonable basis.

Financial performance of each segment 
is measured on adjusted operating 
profit before management recharges. 
Interest and tax are managed on a 
Group basis and not split between 
reportable segments. However the 
related financial liability and cash has 
been allocated out into the reportable 
segments as this is how they are 
managed by the Group.

Segment assets are all non-current and 
current assets, excluding deferred tax 
and income tax, which are shown in 
the eliminations column. Where cash 
shown in one segment is offset within 
the Group’s banking facilities against 
overdrafts in other segments, the 
elimination is shown in the eliminations 
column. Inter-segment receivables and 
payables are eliminated similarly.

Share‑based payments
The Directors are required to estimate 
the fair value of the awards granted 
and the quantum of awards expected 
to vest. This entails the use of pricing 
models for the fair value calculation and 
the Directors use specialist advisers to 
support on this calculation where the 
pricing model is complex. The estimate 
of awards expected to vest requires 
judgement and is reliant on the 
accuracy of management forecasts. 
Details of the key assumptions made 
in the measurement of share-based 
payments are provided in note 25.

Taxation
There are many transactions and 
calculations for which the ultimate 
tax determination is uncertain. 
Significant judgement is required in 
determining the Group’s tax assets 
and liabilities. Deferred tax assets 
have been recognised to the extent 
they are recoverable based on profit 
projections for future years. Income tax 
liabilities for anticipated issues have 
been recognised based on estimates 
of whether additional tax will be due. 
Notwithstanding the above, the Group 
believes that it will recover tax assets 
and has adequate provision to cover 
all risks across all business operations. 
See note 13 for more details.

3 Financial risk management
Risk management is discussed in 
the strategic report and a discussion 
of risks and uncertainties can be 
found on pages 36 to 39 along with 
the Group’s key risks. See note 26 
for additional information about the 
Group’s exposure to each of these 
risks and the ways in which they are 
managed. Below are key financial risk 
management areas:

•  currency risk is mitigated by a 

• 

mixture of forward contracts, spot 
currency purchases and natural 
hedges;
liquidity risk is managed by 
monitoring daily cash balances, 
weekly cash flow forecasts, regular 
reforecasting of monthly working 
capital and regular dialogue with the 
Group’s banks; and

•  credit risk is managed by constant 
review of key debtors and banking 
with reputable banks.

4 Segmental information
The Group has one material 
business activity being the design, 
manufacture and distribution of gift 
packaging and greetings, stationery 
and creative play products, seasonal 
décor, design-led giftware, and 
‘not-for-resale’ consumables.

For management purposes the Group 
is organised into four geographic 
business units.

The results in this note are allocated 
based on the region in which the 
businesses are located; this reflects 
the Group’s management and internal 
reporting structure. The Group has a 
China factory and Asian procurement 
operations which are overseen by 
our UK operational management 
team and we therefore continue to 
include UK owned and managed Asian 
operations within the internal reporting 
of the UK operations, comprising one 
operating segment. 

81

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

4 Segmental information continued

Year ended 31 March 2019 

Revenue  – external 

– inter segment 

Total segment revenue  

Segment result before exceptional items,  
acquisition amortisation, LTIP charges  
and management recharge 

Exceptional items 

Acquisition amortisation 

LTIP charges 

Operating profit 

Finance expenses 

Finance expense treated as exceptional 

Income tax 

Profit for the year ended 31 March 2019 

Balances at 31 March 2019 

Segment assets 

Segment liabilities 

Capital expenditure additions 

UK(a) 

£000 

Europe 
£000 

USA(a) 
£000 

Australia 
£000 

Central & 
eliminations 
£000 

Group
£000

 123,006  

 63,188  

 223,101  

 39,067  

 —  

 448,362 

 4,112  

 1,377  

 —  

 —  

 (5,489) 

 — 

127,118  

 64,565  

 223,101  

 39,067  

 (5,489) 

 448,362 

 8,073  

 8,871  

 15,522  

 4,278  

 (4,098) 

 32,646 

 (8,274)

(1,609)

(3,005)

 19,758 

 (2,318)

(158)

(4,031)

13,251 

188,766  

19,240  

36,306  

13,776 

3,610  

261,698

(28,295) 

 (10,457) 

 (35,931) 

 (7,396) 

 (4,062) 

(86,141)

 – property, plant and equipment 

2,635  

 901  

 1,780 

 383  

 —  

 5,699

 – property, plant and equipment 
on acquisition of business   

– intangible assets 

– intangible assets on acquisition of business 

Depreciation 

Amortisation 

(a)  Including Asian manufacturing and sourcing.

—  

 285  

—  

 2,333  

 167  

—  

 12  

— 

 920  

 35  

9,313 

 1,893  

47,042 

 1,452  

 1,781  

—  

 —  

 —  

 623  

 326  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

 —  

9,313

 2,190 

47,042

 5,328 

 2,309 

82

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Year ended 31 March 2018 

Revenue   – external 

– inter segment 

Total segment revenue   

Segment result before exceptional items,  
acquisition amortisation, LTIP charges  
and management recharge 

Exceptional items 

Acquisition amortisation 

LTIP charges 

Operating profit 

Net finance expenses 

Income tax 

Profit for year ended 31 March 2018  

Balances at 31 March 2018 

Segment assets 

Segment liabilities 

Capital expenditure additions 

UK(a) 

£000 

Europe 
£000 

USA 
£000 

Australia 
£000 

Central & 
eliminations 
£000 

Group
£000

119,283  

 50,977  

 120,284  

 36,972  

 —  

 327,516 

4,031  

 786  

 —  

 —  

 (4,817) 

 — 

 123,314  

 51,763  

 120,284  

 36,972  

 (4,817) 

 327,516 

 7,899  

 6,697  

 9,608  

 2,998  

 (4,003) 

 23,199 

 539 

 (371)

 (2,257)

 21,110 

 (1,392)

 (5,384)

 14,334 

 123,310  

 15,146  

 14,064  

 15,350  

 2,663  

 170,533 

 (31,916) 

 (8,695) 

 (15,983) 

 (9,686) 

 (3,737) 

 (70,017)

– property, plant and equipment 

4,078  

 2,786  

 333  

– property, plant and equipment
on acquisition of business 

– intangible assets 

— 

 109  

– intangible assets on acquisition of business  — 

Depreciation 

Amortisation 

(a)  Including Asian manufacturing and sourcing.

 2,229  

 219  

— 

 50  

— 

 722  

 27  

—  

 1,218  

— 

 871  

 474  

795 

798 

 — 

2,624 

 523  

 98  

 —  

7,992

 —  

 —  

— 

 —  

 —  

798

 1,377

2,624

 4,345 

 818 

•  Capital expenditure consists of additions of property, plant and equipment, intangible assets and goodwill.
•  The Group has one customer that accounts for 18% of the total Group revenues. In the year ended 31 March 2019 total 

sales to that customer were £79,138,000 (2018: £15,978,000). This customer falls solely within the USA operating segment 
above. No other single customer accounts for over 10% of total sales.

•  The assets and liabilities that have not been allocated to segments consist of deferred tax assets £3,160,000 
(2018: £2,663,000), income tax payable of £3,370,000 (2018: £3,364,000) and deferred tax liability £692,000 
(2018: £373,000).

Geographical information
The Group’s information about its segmental assets (non-current assets excluding deferred tax assets and other financial 
assets) and revenue by customer destination and product are detailed below:

UK and Asia 

USA 

Europe 

Australia 

Non-current assets

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000

 40,539  

 40,126 

 61,559  

 9,076 

 16,350  

 16,610 

5,077  

 6,234 

 123,525  

 72,046 

83

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

4 Segmental information continued
Revenue by customer destination 

UK 

USA 

Europe 

Australia 

Rest of the world 

All revenue arose from the sale of goods.

5 Expenses and auditor’s remuneration
Included in profit are the following charges/(credits):

Depreciation  

Loss on sales of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets 

Release of deferred grant income 

Amortisation of intangible assets  

Operating lease payment – minimum lease payment 

Sub-lease rental income  

Write down of inventories to net realisable value   

Reversal of previous write downs on inventory 

Loss on foreign exchange 

Auditor’s remuneration:

Amounts receivable by auditor and its associates in respect of: 

Audit of these financial statements 

Audit of financial statements of subsidiaries pursuant to legislation 

– Overseas subsidiaries 

– UK subsidiaries 

Tax services 

Services relating to corporate finance transactions 

Other services 

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000 

97,260 

89,292 

235,092 

136,782 

68,314 

37,707 

9,989 

58,080 

36,972 

6,390 

2019 
% 

22 

53 

15 

8 

2 

2018 
%

27

42

18

11

2

448,362 

327,516 

100 

100

Note 

11  

7  

12  

27  

7  

14  

14  

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000

5,328  

4,345 

325  

(247) 

2,309  

4,865  

(583) 

4,173  

(478) 

814  

17 

(99)

818 

5,289 

(710)

5,491 

(197)

373 

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000

90 

37 

326  

66  

40 

— 

10 

184 

51 

31 

54

5

84

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
6 Staff numbers and costs
The average number of persons employed by the Group (including Directors) during the year, analysed by category, was as 
follows:

Selling and administration 

Production and distribution 

The aggregate payroll costs of these persons were as follows: 

Wages and salaries 

Share-based payments – Long Term Incentive Plan 

Social security costs 

Other pension costs 

Number of employees

2019 

641  

1,723  

2,364  

2018

520 

1,434 

1,954

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000

62,083  

51,283 

3,005  

4,795  

3,532  

2,257 

3,950 

3,634 

73,415  

61,124 

Note 

25  

For information on Directors’ remuneration please refer to the section titled ‘Directors’ remuneration’ within the Directors’ 
remuneration report (pages 57 and 58) and Long Term Incentive Plan (page 58), which form part of these audited 
financial statements. 

7 Other operating income

Grant income received   

Sub-lease rentals credited to the income statement 

Other 

Exceptional items 

8 Finance expenses

Interest payable on bank loans and overdrafts 

Other similar charges 

Finance charges in respect of finance leases 

Unwinding of fair value discounts 

Interest payable under the effective interest method 

Derivative financial instruments at fair value through the income statement  

Exceptional items 

10  

2019 
£000 

247  

583  

(210) 

620  

— 

620  

2019 
£000 

2,334  

(74) 

— 

86  

2018 
£000

99 

710 

(424)

385 

1,092 

1,477 

2018 
£000

946 

332 

2 

80 

2,346  

1,360 

(28) 

2,318  

158  

2,476  

32 

1,392 

—

1,392 

85

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

9 Taxation
Recognised in the income statement

Current tax charge 

Current year 

Adjustments for previous periods 

Deferred tax charge/(credit) 

Origination and reversal of temporary differences 

Adjustments in respect of previous periods 

Total tax in income statement 

Total tax charge/(credit) on adjusted items 

Total tax on profit before exceptional items, acquisition amortisation and LTIP costs 

Total tax on exceptional items 

Total tax on acquisition amortisation  

Total tax on LTIP costs   

Total tax in income statement 

Reconciliation of effective tax rate

Profit before tax 

Profit before tax multiplied by the standard rate of corporation tax rate of 19% in the UK (2018: 19%) 

Effects of: 

Income not taxable  

Expenses not deductible for tax purposes 

Movement in unrecognised tax assets 

Effect of tax rate changes 

Differences between UK and overseas tax rates   

Movement in uncertain tax provision 

Local tax incentives 

Other items 

Adjustments in respect of previous periods 

Total tax in income statement 

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000

4,770  

38  

4,808  

(617) 

(160) 

(777) 

4,031 

7,094 

(2,038) 

(847) 

(178) 

3,355 

128 

3,483 

1,986 

(85)

1,901 

5,384 

6,188 

(238)

(121)

(445)

4,031  

5,384 

2019 
£000 

17,282  

3,284 

2018 
£000

19,718 

3,746 

(88) 

208  

296  

33  

(502)

249 

270 

593 

1,053  

1,637 

(408) 

(100) 

(125) 

(122) 

(400)

(108)

(90)

(11)

4,031 

5,384 

86

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
10 Exceptional items
These include acquisition related costs and reorganisation and restructuring costs. These items are excluded to present 
the performance of the business in a consistent manner and in line with how the business is managed and measured on a 
day-to-day basis. They are typically gains or costs associated with events that are not considered to form part of the core 
operations, or are considered to be a ‘non-recurring’ event (although they may span several accounting periods). 

Acquisition related costs
Costs associated with acquisitions, including legal and advisory fees on deals, form part of our reported results on an IFRS 
basis. These costs, however, in our view form part of the capital transaction and as they are not attributed to investment 
value under IFRS 3, they are excluded from our adjusted measures for the purposes of reporting underlying results. Similarly, 
where acquisitions have employee related payments (exclusive of LTIPs) which lock in and incentivise legacy talent, we have 
also excluded these costs. As these costs are employment linked, they are treated as an expense and form part of the IFRS 
results, however, as with transaction costs, we do not consider these to form part of the underlying results of the business. 
In accordance with IFRS 3, on acquisition, businesses need to be fair valued, which can result in an uplift to stock on hand 
relating to sales orders already attached to the acquired stock. This uplift will distort the margins associated with the stock, 
and typically unwinds quickly as stock is sold soon after acquisition. The unwind of the stock uplift is excluded from our 
adjusted results as we deem this to be a cost of the acquisition. 

Reorganisation and restructuring costs
In order to maximise efficiencies, as well as recognise synergies from acquisitions, certain projects are undertaken to 
achieve these. These are projects outside of the normal operations of the business and typically are very sizeable in terms of 
costs. This is particularly relevant during a large scale restructuring that can result in some disruption to the normal business 
(for example manufacturing patterns) leading to operational inefficiencies occurring in this time frame. If we deem this to be 
the case, we will present the details and associated costs of the projects separately in our financial statements and exclude 
them from our adjusted measures. 

Year ended 31 March 2019 

Transaction costs(a) 

UK unification(b) 

US restructure(c) 

Total before tax 

Income tax credit 

Exceptional items after tax 

(a)  Transaction costs relating predominantly to the acquisition of Impact Innovations Inc.

Cost of 
sales 
£000 

— 

— 

(1,748) 

(1,748) 

Selling 
expenses 
£000 

— 

— 

(222) 

(222) 

Admin 
expenses 
£000 

(2,254) 

(428) 

(3,622) 

(6,304) 

Other 
finance 
expenses 
£000 

Total 
£000

(158) 

(2,412)

— 

— 

(158) 

(428)

(5,592)

(8,432)

2,038 

 (6,394)

(b)  Remaining unification cost associated with relocating a part of our UK business to another site and associated redundancies with the move.

(c)  The restructure of our US operations including the profit on sale of our manufacturing facility in Midway and closure costs. The cost of relocating equipment and 

personnel to Memphis, Tennessee along with manufacturing inefficiencies associated with the start up of converting operations. The charge relating to the unwind 
of the inventory fair value adjustment arising on acquisition and final charges in relation to the Lang integration.

Year ended 31 March 2018 

Transaction costs(d) 

Sale of Hirwaun property(e) 

Total before tax 

Income tax credit 

Exceptional items after tax 

Admin 
expenses 
£000 

(553) 

— 

(553) 

Other 
operating 
income 
£000 

— 

1,092  

1,092  

Total 
£000

(553)

1,092 

539 

238 

 777 

(d)  Transaction costs relate predominantly to the acquisition of the trade and certain assets of Biscay Greetings Pty Limited (Biscay) and of the remaining costs from the 

acquisition of Lang.

(e)  The exceptional gain on the sale of the Hirwaun property in Wales, comprises of the sale proceeds net of any related costs including restructuring for the rationalisation 

of operations to suit the revised footprint.

87

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

10 Exceptional items continued
The cash flow effect on exceptional items
There was £287,000 net outflow on the current year’s cash flow (2018: £1,637,000 inflow) which included £473,000 
(2018: £350,000) of outflow deferred from last year.

11 Property, plant and equipment

Cost 

Land and buildings 

Freehold 
£000 

Leasehold 
£000 

Plant and 
equipment 
£000 

Fixtures and 
fittings 
£000 

Motor
vehicles 
£000 

Total 
£000

Balance at 1 April 2017  

21,393  

10,501  

48,172  

3,460  

955  

84,481 

Additions 

Disposals 

Additions on acquisition of business  

Transfers to computer software 

Effect of movements in foreign exchange 

Balance at 1 April 2018  

Additions 

Disposals 

Additions on acquisition of business  

Transfers between fixed asset categories 

Transfers to computer software 

Effect of movements in foreign exchange 

Balance at 31 March 2019 

Depreciation and impairment 

Balance at 1 April 2017  

Depreciation charge for the year 

Disposals 

Transfers to computer software 

Effect of movements in foreign exchange 

Balance at 1 April 2018  

Depreciation charge for the year 

Disposals 

Transfers between fixed asset categories 

Transfers to computer software 

Effect of movements in foreign exchange 

432  

(1,903) 

— 

— 

174  

20,096  

1,078  

(405) 

462  

(57) 

— 

(127) 

138  

— 

— 

— 

(1,006) 

9,633  

126  

(8,252) 

— 

83  

— 

636  

6,588  

(4,148) 

424  

— 

(963) 

804  

(216) 

27  

294  

(128) 

30  

(18) 

347  

— 

(60) 

7,992 

(6,285)

798 

294 

(1,983)

50,073  

4,241  

1,254  

85,297 

3,712  

(352) 

8,851  

(43) 

(620) 

351  

550  

(285) 

— 

17  

— 

62  

233  

(351) 

— 

— 

— 

(8) 

5,699 

(9,645)

9,313 

—

(620)

914 

21,047  

2,226  

61,972  

4,585  

1,128  

90,958 

(11,511) 

(5,036) 

(32,268) 

(2,575) 

(749) 

1,349  

— 

(67) 

(470) 

— 

— 

447  

(2,590) 

4,079  

— 

544  

(389) 

205  

(239) 

76  

(10,978) 

(5,059) 

(30,235) 

(2,922) 

(769) 

152  

6  

— 

57  

(414) 

3,769  

— 

— 

(301) 

(3,478) 

86  

35  

170  

(224) 

(502) 

248  

(41) 

— 

(44) 

(484) 

(147) 

9  

— 

18  

(604) 

(165) 

84  

— 

— 

6  

(51,874)

(4,345)

5,642 

(239)

1,018 

(49,798)

(5,328)

4,339 

—

170 

(506)

Balance at 31 March 2019 

(11,532) 

(2,005) 

(33,646) 

(3,261) 

(679) 

(51,123)

Net book value 

Balance at 31 March 2019 

At 31 March 2018 

9,515  

9,118  

221  

28,326  

4,574  

19,838  

1,324  

1,319  

449  

650  

39,835

35,499 

Depreciation is charged to either cost of sales, selling costs or administration costs within the income statement depending 
on the department to which the assets relate.

Security
All freehold properties are subject to a fixed charge.

88

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
12 Intangible assets

Cost 

Balance at 1 April 2017  

Additions 

Additions on acquisition of businesses 

Transfer from fixed assets 

Disposals 

Effect of movements in foreign exchange 

Balance at 1 April 2018  

Additions 

Additions on acquisition of businesses 

Transfer from fixed assets 

Disposals 

Effect of movements in foreign exchange 

Balance at 31 March 2019 

Amortisation and impairment 

Balance at 1 April 2017   

Amortisation for the year 

Impairments 

Transfers from fixed assets 

Disposals 

Effect of movements in foreign exchange 

Balance at 1 April 2018  

Amortisation for the year 

Transfers from fixed assets 

Disposals 

Effect of movements in foreign exchange 

Goodwill 
£000 

Computer 
software 
£000 

Trade 
names 
£000 

Customer 
lists 
£000 

Other 
intangibles 
£000 

Total 
£000

42,474  

—  

1,703  

—  

—  

(809) 

43,368  

—  

28,042  

—  

(33) 

404  

4,151  

1,377  

—  

(294) 

(40) 

(325) 

4,869  

2,190  

—  

620  

(940) 

246  

320  

—  

197  

—  

—  

(44) 

473  

—  

680  

—  

724  

—  

—  

(110) 

1,294  

—  

1,846  

17,154  

—  

—  

20  

—  

—  

44  

133  

47,758 

—  

—  

—  

—  

—  

133  

—  

—  

—  

—  

—  

1,377 

2,624 

(294)

(40)

(1,288)

50,137 

2,190 

47,042 

620 

(973)

714 

71,781  

6,985  

2,339  

18,492  

133  

99,730 

(10,443) 

(3,204) 

—  

(36) 

—  

—  

785  

(447) 

—  

239  

39  

228  

(9,694) 

(3,145) 

—  

—  

33  

(475) 

(700) 

(170) 

609  

(101) 

(80) 

(120) 

—  

—  

—  

14  

(186) 

(392) 

—  

—  

(11) 

(260) 

(233) 

—  

—  

—  

36  

(457) 

(1,214) 

—  

—  

(26) 

(90) 

(18) 

—  

—  

—  

—  

(14,077)

(818)

(36)

239 

39 

1,063 

(108) 

(13,590)

(3) 

—  

—  

—  

(2,309)

(170)

642 

(613)

Balance at 31 March 2019 

(10,136) 

(3,507) 

(589) 

(1,697) 

(111) 

(16,040)

Net book value 

Balance at 31 March 2019 

At 31 March 2018 

61,645  

33,674  

3,478  

1,724  

1,750  

16,795  

287  

837  

22  

25  

83,690 

36,547 

The aggregate carrying amounts of goodwill allocated to each geographical segment are as follows:

UK and Asia 

Europe  

USA 

Australia 

Total 

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000

25,600  

25,600 

5,248  

5,329 

28,042 

 2,755  

— 

2,745 

61,645  

33,674 

89

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

12 Intangible assets continued
Impairment
The Group tests goodwill each year for impairment, or more frequently if there are indications that goodwill might 
be impaired.

For the purposes of impairment testing, goodwill considered significant in comparison to the Group’s total carrying amount 
of such assets has been allocated to the business unit, or group of business units, that are expected to benefit from the 
synergies of the combination (see table on page 89), which represents the lowest level within the Group at which the goodwill 
is monitored for internal management purposes, and is referred to below as a cash-generating unit. During the last few 
years the businesses have begun to work more closely with each other, exploiting the synergies that arise. The recoverable 
amounts of cash-generating units are determined from the higher of value in use and fair value less costs to sell. 

The Group prepares cash flow forecasts for each cash-generating unit derived from the most recent financial budgets for the 
following three years which are approved by the Board. The key assumptions in those budgets are sales, margins achievable 
and overhead costs, which are based on past experience and future expectations. The Group then extrapolates cash flows 
for the following five years plus a terminal value based on a conservative estimate of market growth of 0.5% (2018: between 
0.5% and 2.0%). 

Generally the Group’s post tax weighted average cost of capital ('WACC') is 8% and this has been compared to other similar 
companies and is felt to be appropriate. 

The cash-generating units used the following pre-tax discount rates which are derived from an estimate of the Group’s future 
WACC adjusted to reflect the market assessment of the risks specific to the current estimated cash flows over the same 
period. 

Pre-tax discount rates used were:

UK and Asia 

Europe  

USA 

Australia 

2019 

10.9% 

11.7% 

12.5% 

13.4% 

2018

10.4%

10.7%

—

12.4%

All of the cash-generating units’ values in use were determined to be higher than fair value less costs to sell, thus this was 
used as the recoverable amount. In all businesses, the carrying value of the goodwill was supported by the recoverable 
amount and there are currently no reasonably foreseeable changes to assumptions that would give rise to an impairment 
of the carrying value.

The Directors do not believe a reasonably possible change to the assumptions would give rise to an impairment. 
The Directors have considered a 3% movement in the discount rate and a flat budget growth rate assumption in their 
sensitivity assessment; with these changes in assumptions there is still considerable headroom and no indication of 
impairment.

90

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
13 Deferred tax assets and liabilities
Recognised deferred tax assets and liabilities
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are attributable to the following:

At 1 April 2018 

(Charge)/credit to income statement  

(Charge)/credit to equity 

At 31 March 2019 

Deferred tax liabilities 

Deferred tax assets 

At 1 April 2017 

(Charge)/credit to income statement  

(Charge)/credit to equity 

Acquisitions 

At 31 March 2018 

Deferred tax liabilities 

Deferred tax assets 

  Property, plant 
Tax losses 
  and equipment  carried forward 

Share-based 
payments 

Other timing 
differences(a) 

(1,137) 

(2,653) 

(115) 

(3,905) 

(4,159) 

254  

(3,905) 

584  

1,103  

187  

1,874  

—  

1,874  

1,874  

1,943  

1,004  

(358) 

2,589  

—  

2,589  

2,589  

900  

1,325  

135  

2,360  

(205) 

2,565  

2,360  

Tax losses 
  Property, plant 
  and equipment  carried forward 

Share-based 
payments 

Other timing 
differences(a) 

(1,173) 

75  

(39) 

—  

(1,137) 

(1,318) 

181  

(1,137) 

1,794  

(1,152) 

(58) 

—  

584  

—  

584  

584  

1,949  

2,303  

150  

(156) 

—  

1,943  

—  

1,943  

1,943  

(974) 

(216) 

(213) 

900  

(140) 

1,040  

900  

Total

2,290 

779 

(151)

2,918 

(4,364)

7,282 

2,918 

Total

4,873 

(1,901)

(469)

(213)

2,290 

(1,458)

3,748 

2,290

(a)  Other timing differences include a closing balance of £905,000 (2018: £819,000) in respect of provision for doubtful debts and £1,851,000 (2018: £1,086,000) provision for 

inventory.

Deferred tax is presented net on the balance sheet in so far as a right of offset exists. The net deferred tax asset is 
£3,610,000 (2018: £2,663,000) and the net deferred tax liability is £692,000 (2018: £373,000).

The deferred tax asset in respect of tax losses carried forward at 31 March 2019 of £1,874,000 (2018: £584,000) comprises 
UK tax losses of £991,000 (2018: £440,000) and US losses of £883,000 (2018: £144,000). The majority of the US tax losses 
carried forward will become irrecoverable in March 2029. UK tax losses may be carried forward indefinitely. The deferred 
tax assets have been recognised where the Board considers there is sufficient evidence that taxable profits will be available 
against which the tax losses can be utilised. The Board expects that the tax losses will be recoverable against future profits. 
Deferred tax assets in respect of taxable losses that are expected to be recovered outside this forecast period have not 
been recognised. This includes unrecognised deferred tax assets in respect of UK losses of £574,000 (2018: £310,000), 
£369,000 (2018: £490,000) in respect of China, and £235,000 (2018: £221,000) in respect of Asia.

A deferred tax liability of £237,000 (2018: £153,000) has been recognised based on the tax cost of remitting earnings from 
China. No other deferred tax liability has been recognised on unremitted earnings of the overseas subsidiaries as if all 
unremitted earnings were repatriated with immediate effect, no other tax charge would be payable. A 17% UK corporate tax 
rate was substantively enacted on 6 September 2016 and will replace the current effective rate of 19% from 1 April 2020. 
A reduction in the US federal corporation tax rate from 35% to 21% was announced in 2017 and enacted effective 
1 January 2018. These rate reductions have been reflected in the calculation of deferred tax at the balance sheet date.

Included within current tax liabilities is £1,263,000 (2018: £1,670,000) in respect of uncertain tax positions. This consists of 
various tax risks which individually are not material. These risks arise because the Group operates in a complex multinational 
tax environment. The position is reviewed on an ongoing basis and generally these tax positions are released at the end of 
the relevant territories’ statute of limitations. 

A total tax credit of £764,000 has been recognised through the statement of changes in equity in respect of share-based 
payments (consisting of a deferred tax debit and current tax credit of (£358,000) and £1,122,000 respectively).

There are no deferred tax balances with respect to cash flow hedges.

91

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

14 Inventory

Raw materials and consumables 

Work in progress 

Finished goods 

2019 
£000 

19,242  

7,818  

42,511 

69,571  

2018 
£000

6,325 

8,927 

34,059 

49,311 

Of the £69,571,000 (2018: £49,311,000) stock value £63,001,000 (2018: £46,984,000) is held at cost and £6,570,000 
(2018: £2,327,000) is held at net realisable value. The write down in the year of inventories to net realisable value amounted 
to £4,173,000 (2018: £5,491,000). The reversal of previous write downs amounted to £478,000 (2018: £197,000). The reversal 
is due to the inventory being either used or sold.

Materials, consumables, changes in finished goods and work in progress recognised as a cost of sale amounted to 
£323,486,000 (2018: £228,776,000).

15 Trade and other receivables

Trade receivables 

Prepayments and accrued income 

Other receivables 

VAT receivable 

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000

39,778  

32,490 

4,822  

171  

634  

1,553 

3,015 

311 

45,405  

37,369 

The Group had receivable financing arrangements in the UK, Europe, the US and Hong Kong. None of this facility was drawn 
at 31 March 2019 (2018: £nil).

Please see note 17 for more details of the banking facilities.

There are no trade receivables in the current year (2018: £nil) expected to be recovered in more than twelve months.

The Group’s exposure to credit and currency risks and provisions for doubtful debts related to trade and other receivables is 
disclosed in note 26.

16 Cash and cash equivalents/bank overdrafts

Cash and cash equivalents per cash flow statement 

Net cash 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Bank loans and overdrafts 

Loan arrangement fees  

Net cash as used in the financial review 

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000

19,458  

9,031 

Note 

17 

2019 
£000 

19,458  

(2,405) 

31  

17,084  

2018 
£000

9,031 

(4,780)

105 

4,356 

The Group’s exposure to interest rate risk and sensitivity analysis for financial assets and liabilities are disclosed in note 26.

The bank loans and overdrafts are secured by a fixed charge on certain of the Group’s land and buildings, a fixed charge on 
certain of the Group’s book debts and a floating charge on certain of the Group’s other assets. See note 17 for further details 
of the Group’s loans and overdrafts.

92

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
17 Loans and borrowings
This note provides information about the contractual terms of the Group’s interest-bearing loans and borrowings. For more 
information about the Group’s exposure to interest rate and foreign currency risk, see note 26.

Non-current liabilities  

Secured bank loans (see page 94) 

Loan arrangement fees  

Current liabilities 

Current portion of secured bank loans (see page 94) 

Loan arrangement fees  

Terms and debt repayment schedule 

Due within one year:

Bank loans and borrowings (see page 94) 

Due between one and two years:

Secured bank loans (see page 94) 

Due between two and five years:

Secured bank loans (see page 94) 

Changes in liabilities from financing activities 

Balance at 1 April 2017   

Changes from financing cash flows  

New bank loans raised   

Repayment of borrowings  

New loan arrangement fees  

Other changes  

Amortisation of loan arrangement fees  

Effect of movements in foreign exchange  

Balance at 1 April 2018  

Changes from financing cash flows

Repayment of borrowings 

New loan arrangement fees 

Other changes

Amortisation of loan arrangement fees 

Effect of movements in foreign exchange 

Balance at 31 March 2019 

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000

1,421  

— 

1,421  

3,791 

(10)

3,781 

984  

(31) 

953  

2019 
£000 

989 

(95)

894 

2018 
£000

984  

989 

984  

989 

437  

2,405  

2,802 

4,780 

Loans and 
borrowings 
£000 

Loan  
arrangement 
fees 
£000

— 

(271)

5,108 

(165) 

— 

— 

(163) 

4,780 

(2,350) 

— 

— 

(25) 

2,405 

—

—

(111)

277

(105)

—

(30)

104

—

(31)

93

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

17 Loans and borrowings continued
Secured bank loans
The wholly owned Group during the year was funded by HSBC. The facilities comprise:

•  a three-year revolving credit facility (‘RCF’) for £28 million which is sufficient to fund the Group’s core financing 

requirements;

•  receivables financing arrangements for an initial term of three years in the UK, Europe, USA and Hong Kong; and
•  a further flexible ‘working capital’ RCF with availability varying from month to month to meet requirements during the 
seasonal inventory build. This is reviewed annually but capable of extension to match the maturity of the core RCF.

While the facilities have no overall limit in total the Group, estimates the effectively available facilities at over £139.0 million, 
more than sufficient to cover the peak requirements. The facilities have flexible elements within them that mean they can 
grow with the Group’s requirements. 

The facility was capable of extension for two further years at the same terms should the parties agree. The second one year 
extension was agreed in May 2018. This takes the date for maturity of the facility to May 2021.

Invoice financing arrangements are secured over the trade receivables that they are drawn on. The RCF facilities are secured 
with a fixed and floating charge over all other assets of the Group. The facilities do not amortise with time.

There are financial covenants, tested quarterly, attached to the existing facilities as follows:

• 

• 

interest cover, being the ratio of earnings before interest, depreciation and amortisation to interest on a rolling 
twelve-month basis; and
leverage, being the ratio of debt to pre-exceptional EBITDA on a rolling twelve-month basis.

There is a further covenant tested monthly in respect of the working capital RCF by which available asset cover must not fall 
below agreed levels relative to amounts drawn.

In January 2018, the Group’s Australia business obtained a secured loan from Westpac of £5,108,000 (AU$9,000,000). 
This is repayable monthly over a five year period. It is subject to a variable interest rate linked to the Australian base rate. 
£2,350,000 was repaid during the year which, along with £25,000 exchange movement results in a balance at 31 March 2019 
of £2,405,000 (AU$4,400,000).

On 5 June we entered into a new three year Group facility with a club of five banks chosen to reflect and support the 
geographical spread of the Group. HSBC continue to be significant partner and have been joined in the new facility by 
NatWest, BNP Paribas, Sun Trust and PNC.

The new Group facilities, which run to May 2022, comprises of:

•  a revolving credit facility (‘RCF A’) of $80.0 million;
•  a further flexible revolving credit facility (‘RCF B’) with availability varying from month to month of up to £85.0 million. 

This RCF is flexed to meet our working capital requirements during those months when inventory is being built within our 
annual business cycle and is nil when not required, minimising carry costs; and

•  the existing invoice financing arrangements in Hong Kong which will remain in place for a minimum of the first year.

In total, the available facilities at approximately £160 million are more than sufficient to cover our peak requirements. 
Being partially framed in US dollars they provide a hedge against currency movements. The facilities, which do not amortise 
with time, include an additional uncommitted amount to finance potential acquisitions.

See pages 33 and 34 of the executive review for further details.

94

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 201918 Deferred income

Included within non-current liabilities 

Deferred grant income   

Included within current liabilities   

Deferred grant income   

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000

751  

998 

99  

99 

The deferred grant income is in respect of government grants relating to the development of the site in Wales.

19 Provisions

Balance at 1 April 2018  

Additions on acquisition of business  

Reclassified from other creditors 

Provisions made in the year 

Provisions released during the year   

Unwinding of fair value discounts 

Provisions utilised during the year 

Effect of movements in foreign exchange 

Balance at 31 March 2019 

Non-current 

Current 

Property 
£000 

986  

2,197  

180  

67  

(9) 

86  

(71) 

(2) 

Other 
£000 

337  

— 

— 

335  

(340) 

— 

— 

(5) 

Total 
£000

1,323 

2,197 

180 

402 

(349)

86 

(71)

(7)

3,434  

327  

3,761 

2019 
£000 

2,671 

1,090  

3,761  

2018 
£000

894 

429 

1,323 

The property provision represents the estimated reinstatement cost of six of the Group’s leasehold properties under fully 
repairing leases and a provision for an onerous lease for one of those properties. A professional valuation was performed 
during 2016 for one of the leasehold properties and the provision was reassessed and is stated after discounting. £935,000 
(2018: £882,000) of the non-current balance relates to a lease expiring in 2036; the balance relates to items between one 
and five years.

Other provisions represents management’s best estimate in respect of minor claims arising in the normal course of business.

20 Other financial liabilities

Included within non-current liabilities 

Other creditors and accruals 

Included within current liabilities   

Other creditors and accruals 

Interest rate swaps and forward foreign currency contracts  
carried at fair value through the income statement 

Interest rate swaps and forward foreign exchange contracts  
carried at fair value through the hedging reserve   

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000

1,817  

1,440 

14,712  

18,832 

— 

2  

40 

116 

14,714  

18,988 

95

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

21 Trade and other payables

Trade payables  

Other payables including income taxes and social security 

VAT payable 

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000

57,336   

37,056 

947  

280  

817 

884 

58,563  

38,757 

22 Share capital 
Authorised share capital at 31 March 2019 and 2018 was £6,047,443 divided into 120,948,860 ordinary shares of 5p each.

In thousands of shares 

In issue at 1 April 

Options exercised during the year 

Share issue as part of the consideration for Impact Innovations, Inc. 

Share placing 

In issue at 31 March – fully paid 

Allotted, called up and fully paid

Ordinary shares of £0.05 each 

Ordinary shares

2019 

2018

63,890 

62,642 

1,655  

3,017  

9,804  

1,248 

—

—

78,366 

63,890

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000

3,918 

3,194

Of the 78,366,000 shares in the Company, 31,000 (2018: 31,000) are held by the International Greetings Employee 
Benefit Trust.

Share options exercised during the year resulted in 200,000 ordinary shares being issued (2018: 510,000) which generated 
cash proceeds of £28,000 (2018: £71,000). 

LTIP options exercised during the year resulted in 1,455,000 ordinary shares being issued at nil cost (2018: 738,000 ordinary 
shares being issued at nil cost).

On 31 August 2018, the Group acquired Impact Innovations, Inc. Part of the consideration was settled by 3,017,000 shares.

On 29 August 2018, the Group raised £31,926,000 (before expenses) by way of a share placing of 6,260,000 new ordinary 
shares at a price of £5.10 per share. On 19 September 2018, the Group raised an additional £18,074,000 (before expenses)  
by way of a share placing of 3,544,000 new ordinary shares at a price of £5.10 per share.

The holders of ordinary shares are entitled to receive dividends as declared from time to time and are entitled to one vote per 
share at meetings of the Company.

96

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
23 Earnings per share

Adjusted earnings per share excluding exceptional items,  
acquisition amortisation and LTIP charges(a) 

Cost per share on exceptional items  

Adjusted earnings per share excluding  
acquisition amortisation and LTIP charges(b) 

Cost per share on acquisition amortisation 

Adjusted earnings per share excluding LTIP charges(c) 

Cost per share on LTIP charge 

Earnings per share(d)   

2019 

Diluted  
pence 

29.3  

(8.6) 

20.7  

(0.9) 

19.8  

(3.8) 

16.0  

Basic 
pence 

29.6  

(8.7) 

20.9  

(0.9) 

20.0  

(3.8) 

16.2  

2018

Diluted 
pence 

22.1  

1.4  

23.5  

(0.3) 

23.2  

(2.7) 

20.5  

Basic 
pence

22.7

1.4 

24.1 

(0.2)

23.9 

(2.8)

21.1 

(a)  Excludes exceptional items, acquisition amortisation and LTIP charges of £12,891,000 (2018: £1,889,000) and tax relief 
attributable to those items of £3,016,000 (2018: £765,000), to give adjusted profit (including the effect of non-controlling 
interest) of £21,800,000 (2018: £14,669,000).

(b)  Excludes acquisition amortisation and LTIP charges of £4,459,000 (2018: £2,589,000) and tax relief attributable to those 

items of £978,000 (2018: £554,000), to give adjusted profit (including the effect of non-controlling interest) of £15,406,000 
(2018: £15,580,000).

(c)  Excludes LTIP charges of £3,005,000 (2018: £2,257,000) and tax relief attributable to those items of £178,000 (2018: 
£445,000), to give adjusted profit (including the effect of non-controlling interest) of £14,752,000 (2018: £15,357,000).

(d)  The basic earnings per share is based on the profit attributable to equity holders of the Company of £11,925,000 

(2018: £13,545,000) and the weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue of 73,661,000 (2018: 64,538,000) 
calculated as follows:

In thousands of shares  

Issued ordinary shares at 1 April 

Shares held by Employee Benefit Trust 

Shares relating to share options 

Shares issued as part of the consideration for Impact 

Shares issued in respect of share placing 

Weighted average number of shares at 31 March 

2019 

2018

63,890 

62,642

(31) 

 2,506  

 1,752  

 5,544  

(31)

1,927

 — 

 — 

73,661 

64,538

Diluted earnings per share
The average number of share options under the Executive share options 2008 scheme outstanding in the year is nil 
(2018: 612,795 at an average exercise price of 14p). The average number of share options under the LTIP scheme outstanding 
in the year is 1,366,118 (2018: 1,371,743) at nil cost. The diluted earnings per share is calculated assuming all these options 
were exercised, and taking into account LTIP awards whose specified performance conditions were satisfied at the end  
of the reporting period of 723,632 share options. At 31 March 2019 the diluted number of shares was 74,385,000  
(2018: 66,358,000).

97

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

24 Dividends paid and proposed
A final dividend for year ending 31 March 2018 of 4.00p (for year ending 31 March 2017: 2.75p) was paid on 6 September 2018. 
An interim dividend of 2.50p was paid on 18 January 2019 (2018: 2.00p). The Directors are recommending a final dividend of 
6.00p per share in respect of the year ended 31 March 2019 (2018: 4.00p). If approved it will be paid in September 2019 to 
shareholders on the register at the close of business on 2 August 2019.

Final equity dividend for prior year 

Interim equity dividend for current year 

Dividends paid in the year 

Proposed for approval at Annual General Meeting   

Final equity dividend for the current year 

2019 

2018

Pence  
per share 

4.00  

2.50  

2019 

Pence  
per share 

6.00  

£000 

2,597  

1,956  

4,553  

£000 

4,702 

Pence 
per share 

2.75  

2.00  

2018

Pence 
per share 

4.00  

£000

1,734 

1,266 

3,000 

£000

2,556 

25 Share‑based payments
Executive share options 2008
Options to subscribe for ordinary shares of a nominal value of 5p each were granted, pursuant to the Company’s approved and 
unapproved employee share option schemes, which are exercisable at dates ranging from December 2011 to December 2018 
and at an exercise price of 14.00p.

There were no performance conditions attached to the approved options (other than continued employment). For the 
unapproved options awarded to Executive Directors there were conditions related to profitability for the two years to March 2011. 
These conditions were fully met.

As at 31 March 2019 there were no approved options outstanding (2018: 200,000) with a weighted average contractual life of 0 
years (2018: 0.7 years). No share options were granted under this scheme during the year (2018: nil).

The number and weighted average exercise prices of share options are as follows:

Outstanding at the beginning of the period 

Exercised during the period 

Outstanding at the end of the period  

Exercisable at the end of the period   

2019 

2018

Weighted  
average  
exercise price  
pence 

Weighted 
average  
exercise price 
pence 

Number of 
options 

14.00 

200,000  

14.00 

(200,000) 

14.00 

14.00 

— 

— 

14.00 

14.00 

14.00 

14.00 

Number of 
options

710,000 

(510,000)

200,000

200,000

The weighted average share price at the date of exercise of share options exercised during the period was 547.8p  
(2018: 376.0p).

98

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Long Term Incentive Plan
On 31 March 2014, the Group announced the introduction of a new Long Term Incentive Plan (‘LTIP’). Under the LTIP, options 
to subscribe for ordinary shares of a nominal value of 5p each ('ordinary shares') may be awarded annually to Executive 
Board Directors of the Company, Managing Directors and other selected senior management team members within the 
Group. Ordinary shares only vest to the degree that stretching performance conditions are met. The maximum dilution under 
the LTIP is 15% over a ten year period, excluding an award made under the 2012-2015 LTIP, of which 1,107,652 share options 
have vested. The scheme rules, which have been agreed by the Remuneration Committee, include reasonable provisions in 
the event of change of control, suitable flexibility to modify performance targets in specified situations and also a mechanism 
for claw-back under certain circumstances. The Board retains the flexibility to buy ordinary shares through an Employee 
Benefit Trust to mitigate future dilution should it need to do so.

The performance period for each award under the LTIP is three years. The cost to employees of ordinary shares issued 
under the LTIP if the performance criteria are met is nil. In principle the number of ordinary shares to be granted to each 
employee under the LTIP will not be more than 325% in value of the relevant employee’s salary base. The maximum 
opportunity available is up to 175% for the CEO and for other Executive Directors up to 150% of base salary. For the 2018-21 
scheme grant B there is an outperformance element of up to 50% of the initial grant.

Vested LTIP schemes – outstanding options

2014-2017 LTIP scheme 

2015-2018 LTIP scheme 

2016-2019 LTIP scheme(a) 

Number of 
  ordinary shares 

273,921 

577,832 

723,632 

  1,575,385 

Exercise 
price  
pence 

nil 

nil 

nil 

Exercise dates

June 2017-August 2024

June 2018-January 2028

June 2019-January 2028

All performance criteria have been met for the above schemes. 

Outstanding at the beginning of the period 

Options vesting during the period(a) 

Exercised during the period 

Outstanding at the end of the period  

Exercisable at the end of the period   

2019 

2018

Weighted  
average  
exercise price  
pence 

Weighted 
average  
exercise price 
pence 

Number of 
options 

Number of 
options

nil  2,306,034  

nil 

723,632  

nil 

(1,454,281) 

nil  1,575,385 

nil  1,575,385 

nil  1,830,351 

nil 

nil 

1,213,794 

(738,111)

nil  2,306,034 

nil  2,306,034 

(a)  The shares relating to the 2016-2019 scheme formally vest on 5 June 2019 following the Remuneration Committee and Audit Committee approval of the results of the year 

ended 31 March 2019.

99

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

25 Share‑based payments continued
Scheme details for LTIPs in vesting periods during the year
During the financial year to 31 March 2019 there were three LTIP schemes still within their vesting periods (2018: three).  
The award and performance targets for these are in the tables below.

Awards

Fair value per share (£)   

Number of participants awarded 

Initial award 

Dividend shares awarded 

Lapses and forfeitures   

2016-2019 

2017-2020 

2018-2021

Grant A 

Grant B 

Grant A 

Grant B 

Grant A 

Grant B

1.82 

23 

4.04 

1  

3.71 

24  

4.04 

2 

5.55 

20  

5.56

5

827,220  

72,885  

347,101  

297,844  

151,859  

633,372 

23,283  

2,714  

7,097  

7,053  

575  

 2,708 

(202,470) 

—  

(48,797) 

—  

(18,280) 

— 

Expected to vest as at 31 March 2019 

 648,033  

 75,599  

305,401 

304,897  

134,154  

636,080 

Expected to vest as at 31 March 2018 

 720,395  

 75,582  

347,278 

 304,829  

— 

— 

The LTIP awards ‘Grant A’ were made in 2017, 2018 and 2019 respectively. The LTIP awards ‘Grant B’ were made in January 
2018 to Paul Fineman in respect of the 2015-2018 and 2016-2019 schemes and to Paul Fineman and Giles Willits in respect 
of the 2017-2020 scheme. There was also a ‘Grant B’ award in respect of the 2018-2021 scheme to Paul Fineman, Giles 
Willits, Lance Burn and the other two member of the Executive Committee in November 2018.

The grant date fair value of the options granted in the year assuming they are to vest in full is £4,364,000 (2018: £3,191,000). 
The exercise price is nil.

Performance targets
Awards are granted with threshold and stretch targets. 25% of the weighted awards vests if the relevant threshold target 
is achieved with straight-line vesting of the balance up to 100% of the weighted award if the stretch target is achieved. 
The EPS(a) target for the 2016-2019 scheme is the sole exception to this: the threshold of 7.5% CAGR(b) pays out at 0%, 
with the award vesting straight-line from here to 100% at stretch.

The ‘Grant B’ of the 2018-2021 scheme also includes a super stretch target which will vest in accordance with the following 
bands relating to CAGR(b) in EPS(a):

•  more than 17% but not more than 20%: 10% x number of shares in respect of which the base award vests;
•  more than 20% but not more than 22.5%: 22% x number of shares in respect of which the base award vests;
•  more than 22.5% but not more than 25%: 35% x number of shares in respect of which the base award vests; and
•  more than 25%: 50% x number of shares in respect of which the base award vests.

Weighting 

Threshold 

Stretch 

Super stretch

2016-19 scheme 

EPS(a) 

PBT(a) 

2017-20 scheme 

EPS(a) 

2018-21 scheme 

EPS(a) 

60% 

40% 

CAGR(b) 7.5% 

CAGR(b) 10% 

CAGR(a) 17.5% 

CAGR(a) 17.5% 

100% 

CAGR(b) 10% 

CAGR(a) 17.5% 

100% 

CAGR(b) 10% 

CAGR(a) 17.0% 

CAGR(a) 25.0%

(a)  EPS before LTIP charges and Board approved exceptional items.

(b)  CAGR = compound annual growth rate.

100

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Share-based payments charges
The total expense recognised for the period arising from equity-settled share-based payments are as follows:

Charge in relation to the 2015-2018 LTIP scheme  

Charge in relation to the 2016-2019 LTIP scheme  

Charge in relation to the 2017-2020 LTIP scheme  

Charge in relation to the 2018-2021 LTIP scheme  

Equity-settled share-based payments 

Social security charge on 2008 executive share option awards 

Social security charge on LTIP awards 

Total equity-settled share-based payments 

2019 
£000 

—  

637  

1,083  

613  

2,333  

— 

672  

2018 
£000

913

473 

291 

— 

1,677 

29 

551 

3,005  

2,257 

Social security charges on share-based payments
Social security is accrued, where applicable, at a rate which management expects to be the prevailing rate when  
share-based incentives are exercised and is based on the latest market value of options expected to vest or having  
already vested.

The total social security accrual outstanding at the year end in respect of share-based payment transactions was £1,088,000 
(2018: £1,197,000). 

26 Financial instruments
Derivative financial assets

Financial assets designated at fair value through the income statement 

2019 
£000 

129 

2018 
£000

113

a) Fair values of financial instruments
The carrying values for each class of financial assets and financial liabilities in the balance sheet, which are given below, 
are not considered to be materially different to their fair values.

As at 31 March 2019, the Group had derivative contracts, which were measured at Level 2 fair value subsequent to initial 
recognition, to the value of an asset of £129,000 (2018: £113,000) and a liability of £2,000 (2018: £156,000).

Derivative financial instruments
The fair value of forward exchange contracts is assessed using valuation models taking into account market inputs such 
as foreign exchange spot and forward rates, yield curves and forward interest rates.

Fair value hierarchy
Financial instruments which are recognised at fair value subsequent to initial recognition are grouped into Levels 1 to 3 
based on the degree to which the fair value is observable. The three levels are defined as follows:

•  Level 1: quoted (unadjusted) prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities;
•  Level 2: other techniques for which all inputs which have a significant effect on the recorded fair value are observable, 

either directly or indirectly; and

•  Level 3: techniques which use inputs which have a significant effect on the recorded fair value that are not based on 

observable market data.

101

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

26 Financial instruments continued
Derivative financial assets continued
b) Credit risk
Financial risk management
Credit risk is the risk of financial loss to the Group if a customer or counterparty to a financial instrument fails to meet its 
contractual obligations and arises principally from the Group’s receivables from customers and investment securities.

The Group’s exposure to credit risk is managed by dealing only with banks and financial institutions with strong credit 
ratings. The Group’s financial credit risk is primarily attributable to its trade receivables.

The main customers of the Group are large and mid-sized retailers, other manufacturers and wholesalers of greetings 
products, service merchandisers and trading companies. The Group has established procedures to minimise the risk of 
default of trade receivables including detailed credit checks undertaken before new customers are accepted and rigorous 
credit control procedures after sale. These processes have proved effective in minimising the level of provisions for doubtful 
debts required.

The amounts presented in the balance sheet are net of allowances for doubtful receivables estimated by the Group’s 
management, based on prior experience and their assessment of the current economic environment. 

Exposure to credit risk
The carrying amount of financial assets represents the maximum credit exposure. Therefore, the maximum exposure to 
credit risk at the balance sheet date was £59,536,000 (2018: £44,649,000) being the total of the carrying amount of financial 
assets, excluding equity investments above.

The maximum exposure to credit risk for trade receivables at the balance sheet date by geographic region was:

UK and Asia 

USA 

Europe 

Australia 

2019 
£000 

8,998 

21,614 

5,303 

3,863 

2018 
£000

10,685

12,863

4,549

4,393

39,778 

32,490

Credit quality of financial assets and impairment losses
There was no change to the level of provision for doubtful debts upon the adoption of IFRS 9. 

The ageing of trade receivables at the balance sheet date was:

Not past due 

Past due 0-60 days 

61-90 days 

More than 90 days 

2019 

2018

Expected  
loss rate 
 % 

  Provisions for 
Gross  doubtful debts 
£000 

£000 

Expected  
loss rate  
% 

Provisions for 
Gross  doubtful debts 
£000
£000 

0.6 

5.4 

18.4 

90.9 

13.2 

31,666  

6,854  

1,601  

5,727  

(200) 

 (369) 

 (295) 

 (5,206) 

45,848  

(6,070) 

— 

1.0 

14.8 

24.7 

2.4 

 19,786  

10,404  

 628  

 2,476  

 33,294  

 — 

 (100)

 (93)

 (611)

 (804)

There were no unimpaired balances outstanding at 31 March 2019 (2018: £nil) where the Group had renegotiated the terms 
of the trade receivable.

The provisions for doubtful debts more than 90 days include £3,700,000 relating to doubtful debts in the opening balance 
sheet of Impact Innovations, Inc.

102

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Expected credit loss assessment
For the Group’s trade receivables, expected credit losses are measured using a provisioning matrix based on the reason 
the trade receivable is past due. The provision matrix rates are based on actual credit loss experience over the past three 
years and adjusted, when required, to take into account current macro-economic factors. The Group applies experienced 
credit judgement that is determined to be predictive of the risk of loss to assess the expected credit loss, taking into account 
external ratings, financial statements and other available information.

The movement in the allowance for impairment in respect of trade receivables during the year was as follows:

Balance at 1 April  

Charge for the year 

Unused amounts reversed 

Acquisition of businesses 

Amounts written off 

Effects of movement in foreign exchange 

Balance at 31 March   

2019 
£000 

804 

1,697  

(51) 

3,724  

(407) 

303 

6,070 

2018 
£000

822 

434 

(237)

—

(149)

(66)

804

The allowance account for trade receivables is used to record provisions for doubtful debts unless the Group is satisfied that 
no recovery of the amount owing is possible; at that point the amounts considered irrecoverable are written off against the 
trade receivables directly.

c) Liquidity risk
Financial risk management
The Group’s policy with regard to liquidity ensures adequate access to funds by maintaining an appropriate mix of 
short-term and longer-term facilities, which are reviewed on a regular basis. The maturity profile and details of debt 
outstanding at 31 March 2019 are set out in note 17.

The following are the contractual maturities of financial liabilities, including estimated interest payments:

31 March 2019 

Non-derivative financial liabilities  

Carrying 
amount 
£000 

Contractual 
cash flows 
£000 

One year 
or less 
£000 

One to two 
years 
£000 

Two to five 
years 
£000 

More than 
five years 
£000

Note 

Secured bank loans – Australian dollar(a) 

2,405  

(2,532) 

(1,069) 

(1,023) 

20 

21 

21 

16,529  

(16,529) 

(14,712) 

(373) 

57,336  

(57,336) 

(57,336) 

1,227  

(1,227) 

(1,227) 

— 

— 

(440) 

(171) 

— 

— 

—

(1,273)

—

—

Other financial liabilities(b) 

Trade payables(b) 

Other payables(b) 

Derivative financial liabilities 

Forward foreign exchange contracts  
carried at fair value through the  
hedging reserve (b) 

(a)  Nominal interest rate 4.49%.

(b)  Measured at Level 2.

2  

(248) 

(248) 

— 

— 

—

77,499  

(77,872) 

(74,592) 

(1,396) 

(611) 

(1,273)

103

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

26 Financial instruments continued
Derivative financial assets continued
c) Liquidity risk continued
Financial risk management continued

31 March 2018 

Non-derivative financial liabilities  

Carrying 
amount 
£000 

Contractual 
cash flows 
£000 

One year 
or less 
£000 

One to two 
years 
£000 

Two to five 
years 
£000 

More than 
five years 
£000

Note 

Secured bank loans – Australian dollar(a) 

4,780  

(5,242) 

(1,162) 

Other financial liabilities(b) 

Trade payables(b) 

Other payables(b) 

Derivative financial liabilities 

Forward foreign exchange contracts  
carried at fair value through the  
income statement(b) 

Forward foreign exchange contracts  
carried at fair value through the  
hedging reserve(b) 

(a)  Nominal interest rate 3.57%.

(b)  Measured at Level 2.

20 

21 

21 

20,272  

(20,272) 

(18,832) 

37,056  

(37,056) 

(37,056) 

1,701  

(1,701) 

(1,701) 

40  

— 

— 

116  

(5,835) 

(5,835) 

(1,121) 

(176) 

(2,959) 

—

(10) 

(1,254)

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

—

—

—

—

63,965  

(70,106) 

(64,586) 

(1,297) 

(2,969) 

(1,254)

The following table shows the facilities for bank loans, overdrafts, asset-backed loans and revolving credit facilities:

31 March 2019 

31 March 2018

Carrying 
amount 
£000 

Facility used 
contractual 
cash flows 
£000 

Facility 
unused 
£000 

Total 
facility 
£000 

Carrying 
amount 
£000 

Facility used 
contractual 
cash flows 
£000 

Facility 
unused 
£000 

Total 
facility 
£000

Secured bank loans 

2,405  

(2,532) 

— 

(2,532) 

4,780  

(5,242) 

— 

(5,242)

Corporate revolving  
credit facilities 

Receivables financing 

Bank overdraft  

 — 

 — 

 — 

— 

— 

—  

(29,602) 

(29,602) 

(15,967) 

(15,967) 

(3,249) 

(3,249) 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(19,622) 

(19,622)

(17,981) 

(17,981)

(3,654) 

(3,654)

2,405  

(2,532) 

(48,818) 

(51,350) 

4,780  

(5,242) 

(41,257) 

(46,499)

The receivables financing facilities are dependent upon the levels of the relevant receivables. 

The major bank facilities vary in the year depending on forecast debt requirements. The maximum limit across all facilities 
with the major bank was £139.0 million (2018: £127.9 million). 

At 31 March 2019 the facility amounted to £45.6 million (2018: £37.6 million).

Additional facilities were available at other banks of £3.2 million (2018: £3.7 million).

On 5 June 2019 we entered into a new three year Group banking facility, see note 17 for more information.

104

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
d) Cash flow hedges
The following table indicates the periods in which the cash flows associated with cash flow hedging instruments are 
expected to occur:

31 March 2019 

Forward exchange contracts:

Liabilities 

31 March 2018 

Forward exchange contracts:

Liabilities 

Carrying 
amount 
£000 

Contractual 
cash flows 
£000 

One year 
or less 
£000

 2  

 (248) 

 (248)

Carrying 
amount 
£000 

Contractual 
cash flows 
£000 

One year 
or less 
£000

 116  

 (5,835) 

 (5,835)

The Group has forward currency hedging contracts outstanding at 31 March 2019 designated as hedges of expected future 
purchases in US dollars and Chinese renminbi and sales in euros for which the Group has firm commitments. The forward 
currency contracts are being used to hedge the foreign currency risk of the firm commitments.

The terms of the forward currency hedging contracts have been negotiated to match the terms of the commitments.

The cash flow hedges of the expected future purchases in 2020 were assessed to be highly effective and as at 
31 March 2019 a net unrealised gain of £118,000 (2018: £27,000 loss) with related deferred tax credit of £nil (2018: £nil) 
was included in other comprehensive income in respect of these hedging contracts.

e) Market risk
Financial risk management 
Market risk is the risk that changes in market prices, such as foreign exchange rates, interest rates and equity prices, 
will affect the Group’s income or the value of its holdings of financial instruments.

The Group hedges a proportion, as deemed appropriate by management, of its sales and purchases of inventory 
denominated in foreign currency by entering into foreign exchange contracts. Such foreign exchange contracts typically 
have maturities of less than one year. 

The Group rarely hedges profit translation exposure, since such hedges provide only a temporary deferral of the effects of 
movement in foreign exchange rates. Similarly, the Group does not hedge its long-term investments in overseas assets.

However, the Group holds loans that are denominated in the functional currency of certain overseas entities.

The Group’s exposure to foreign currency risk is as follows. This is based on the carrying amount for monetary financial 
instruments, except derivatives, when it is based on notional amounts.

31 March 2019 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Trade receivables 

Other receivables 

Financial assets at fair value through  
the income statement 

Secured bank loans 

Loan arrangement fees  

Trade payables 

Other payables 

Balance sheet exposure 

Notes 

16 

15 

17 

17 

21 

21 

Sterling 
£000 

Euro 
£000 

US dollar 
£000 

65,845  

(4,617) 

(46,596) 

7,731  

966  

5,403  

22,793  

22  

1,651  

110  

— 

31  

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Other 
£000 

4,826  

3,851 

40  

19  

Total 
£000

19,458 

39,778 

2,679 

129 

(2,405) 

(2,405)

— 

31 

(10,494) 

(7,013) 

(30,378) 

(9,451) 

(57,336)

(541) 

(409) 

— 

(277) 

63,648  

(6,614) 

(52,530) 

(3,397) 

(1,227)

1,107 

105

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

26 Financial instruments continued
Derivative financial assets continued
e) Market risk continued
Financial risk management continued

31 March 2018 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Trade receivables 

Other receivables 

Financial assets at fair value through  
the income statement 

Secured bank loans 

Loan arrangement fees  

Trade payables 

Other payables 

Balance sheet exposure 

Note 

16 

15 

17 

17 

21 

21 

Sterling 
£000 

1,040  

9,337  

1,169  

85  

— 

105  

Euro 
£000 

22  

US dollar 
£000 

3,237  

4,525  

14,053  

25  

574  

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Other 
£000 

4,732  

4,575  

— 

28  

Total 
£000

9,031 

32,490 

1,768 

113 

(4,780) 

(4,780)

— 

105 

(10,009) 

(5,368) 

(16,260) 

(5,419) 

(37,056)

(978) 

749  

(497) 

(1,293) 

— 

(226) 

(1,701)

1,604  

(1,090) 

(30)

The following significant exchange rates applied during the year:

Euro 

US dollar 

Average rate 

Reporting date spot rate

2019 

 1.13  

 1.31  

2018 

 1.14  

 1.34  

2019 

 1.16  

1.30  

2018

 1.14 

 1.40 

Sensitivity analysis
A 10% weakening of the following currencies against sterling at 31 March 2019 would have affected equity and profit or loss 
by the amounts shown below. This calculation assumes that the change occurred at the balance sheet date and had been 
applied to risk exposures existing at that date. 

This analysis assumes that all other variables, in particular other exchange rates and interest rates, remain constant. 
The analysis was performed on the same basis for 31 March 2018.

Euro 

US dollar 

Equity 

Profit/(loss)

2019 
£000 

 601  

 4,775  

2018 
£000 

 118  

(146) 

2019 
£000 

 6  

 883  

2018 
£000

 (879)

 (521)

On the basis of the same assumptions, a 10% strengthening of the above currencies against sterling at 31 March 2019 would 
have affected equity and profit or loss by the following amounts:

Equity 

2019 
£000 

 (735) 

 (5,837) 

Profit/(loss)

2018 
£000 

 (144) 

 178  

2019 
£000 

(8) 

 (1,079) 

2018 
£000

 1,075 

 637 

Euro 

US dollar 

106

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Profile
At the balance sheet date the interest rate profile of the Group’s interest-bearing financial instruments was:

Variable rate instruments 

Financial assets 

Financial liabilities  

Loan arrangement fees  

Net debt 

Note 

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000

19,458  

(2,405) 

31  

16 

17,084  

9,031 

(4,780)

105 

4,356 

A change of 50 basis points (0.5%) in interest rates in respect of financial assets and liabilities at the balance sheet date 
would have affected equity and profit or loss by the amounts shown below. This calculation assumes that the change 
occurred at the balance sheet date and had been applied to risk exposures existing at that date. 

This analysis assumes that all other variables, in particular foreign currency rates, remain constant and considers the effect 
on financial instruments with variable interest rates, financial instruments at fair value through profit or loss. The analysis is 
performed on the same basis for 31 March 2018. 

Sensitivity analysis

Equity 

Increase 

Decrease 

Profit or loss 

Increase 

Decrease 

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000

85  

— 

85  

— 

21 

—

21 

—

f) Capital management
The Board’s policy is to maintain a strong capital base so as to maintain investor, creditor and market confidence and to 
sustain future development of the business. The Group is dependent on the continuing support of its bankers for working 
capital facilities and so the Board’s major objective is to keep borrowings within these facilities.

The Board manages as capital its trading capital, which it defines as its net assets plus net debt. Net debt is calculated 
as total debt (bank overdrafts, loans and borrowings as shown in the balance sheet), less cash and cash equivalents. 
The banking facilities with our principal bank have covenants relating to interest cover, cash flow cover and leverage, and 
our articles currently permit borrowings (including letter of credit facilities) to a maximum of four times equity.

Net assets attributable to owners of the Parent Company 

Net cash 

Trading capital 

Equity

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000

Note 

 171,506  

 96,855 

16 

 (17,084) 

 (4,356)

 154,422  

 92,499 

The main areas of capital management relate to the management of the components of working capital including monitoring 
inventory turn, age of inventory, age of trade receivables, balance sheet reforecasting, monthly profit and loss, weekly cash 
flow forecasts and daily cash balances. Major investment decisions are based on reviewing the expected future cash flows 
and all major capital expenditure requires sign off by the CFO and CFO or above certain limits, by the Board. There were no 
major changes in the Group’s approach to capital management during the year. A particular focus of the Group is leverage 
measured as the ratio of average monthly net debt to EBITDA before exceptional items, acquisition amortisation and LTIP 
charges.

107

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

27 Operating leases
Non-cancellable operating lease rentals are payable as follows:

Less than one year 

Between one and five years 

More than five years 

Non-cancellable operating leases are receivable as follows:

Between one and five years 

2019 
£000 

5,236  

10,257  

16,443  

31,936  

2018 
£000

5,108 

9,925 

17,807 

32,840 

2019 
£000 

837  

2018 
£000

1,728 

The Group leases a number of warehouse and factory facilities as well as vehicles and office equipment under operating 
leases. The leases of warehouse and factory facilities typically have an option to renew at the end of the lease term with 
lease payments subject to five-yearly rent reviews.

One of the leased properties has been sublet by the Group and part of a second. The main sub-leases have periods to run 
of between one and five years. Sub-lease payments of £583,000 (2018: £710,000) were received during the financial year.

During the year, £4,865,000 was recognised as an expense in the income statement in respect of operating leases 
(2018: £5,289,000).

28 Capital commitments
At 31 March 2019, the Group had outstanding authorised capital commitments to purchase plant and equipment for 
£2,647,000 (2018: £551,000).

29 Related parties

Sale of goods: 

Hedlunds Pappers Industri AB 

Festive Productions Ltd  

Hedlund Import AB 

S A Greetings (South African Greetings) 

Purchase of goods: 

Mattr Media Ltd 

Receivables 

Hedlund Import AB 

S A Greetings (South African Greetings) 

Balance at 31 March   

108

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000

69  

12  

2,955  

126  

3,162  

56  

56  

29  

31  

60  

172 

24 

2,718 

91 

3,005 

62 

62 

17 

—

17 

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Identity of related parties and trading
Hedlund Import AB and AB Alrick-Hedlund are under the ultimate control of the Hedlund family who are a major shareholder 
in the Company. Anders Hedlund is a director of Hedlunds Pappers Industri AB which is under the ultimate control of the 
Hedlund family. Festive Productions Ltd is a subsidiary undertaking of Malios Holding AG, a company under the ultimate 
control of the Hedlund family.

John Charlton is Chairman of SA Greetings (pty) Ltd and Elaine Bond is a shareholder.

During the year the Company paid £56,000 (2018: £62,000) for marketing services to Mattr Media Ltd, a company controlled 
by Joshua Fineman, who is the son of the Group CEO. 

The above trading takes place in the ordinary course of business and on normal commercial terms.

Other related party transactions
Directors of the Company and their immediate relatives have an interest in 34% (2018: 45%) of the voting shares of the 
Company. The shareholdings of Directors and changes during the year are shown in the Directors’ report on page 60. 

See the Directors’ remuneration report on pages 57 to 58 for more detail.

30 Subsidiary with significant non‑controlling interest
The Company has two subsidiary companies which have a material non-controlling interest, IG Design Group Australia 
Pty Ltd ('Australia') and Anker Play Products LLC ('APP'). Summary financial information in relation to Australia and APP is 
shown below.

Non-controlling interest – balance sheet as at 31 March 

Non-current assets 

Current assets 

Current liabilities 

Non-current liabilities 

Non-controlling interest – comprehensive income for the year ended 31 March 

Revenue 

Profit after tax 

Total comprehensive income 

Non-controlling interest – cash flow for the year ended 31 March 

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents 

Non-controlling interest 

1 April 

Share of profits for the year 

Other comprehensive income 

Recognition of non-controlling interest 

Disposal of Urban Dollar 

Dividend paid to the non-controlling interest 

Currency translation 

31 March 

2019 

Australia 
£000 

4,582  

10,052  

APP 
£000 

16  

Total 
£000 

4,598  

3,219  

13,271  

2018

Australia 
£000

5,538 

7,637 

(6,755) 

(2,600) 

(9,355) 

(5,604)

(143) 

— 

(143) 

Australia 
£000 

2019 

APP 
£000 

Total 
£000 

Australia 
£000

39,067  

11,078  

50,145  

36,972 

2,434  

2,229  

531  

531  

2,965  

2,760  

2019 

APP 
£000 

(35) 

2019 

APP 
£000 

— 

— 

— 

311  

— 

— 

— 

Total 
£000 

409  

Total 
£000 

3,661  

1,326  

(10) 

311  

(110) 

(1,075) 

(52) 

Australia 
£000 

444  

Australia 
£000 

3,661  

1,326  

(10) 

— 

(110) 

(1,075) 

(52) 

3,740  

(45)

2018

1,265 

1,345 

2018

Australia 
£000

550 

2018

Australia 
£000

3,833 

789 

40 

—

—

(575)

(426)

311  

4,051  

3,661 

109

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

31 Acquisitions of subsidiaries
Acquisitions in the current period
Impact Innovations Inc.
On 31 August 2018, the Group acquired 100% of the equity of Impact Innovations Inc. ('Impact'), a leading supplier of gift 
packaging and seasonal décor products in the US.

The acquisition, made through a wholly owned subsidiary of IG Design Group plc, IG Design Group Americas Inc., was  
satisfied by total consideration of £82.2 million ($107.2 million), £66.8 million paid in cash and the remaining £15.4 million 
settled in shares in IG Design Group plc. The consideration (excluding the working capital adjustment) represents 4.9 times 
underlying EBITDA multiple.

Founded in 1968 and employing more than 250 staff globally, Impact is a designer, manufacturer and distributor of seasonal 
and special occasions products specialising in paper, fabric and décor. The company is headquartered in Clara City, 
Minnesota, where its fabric and décor business is located, and its gift wrap manufacturing, warehousing and distribution 
facilities are located in Memphis, Tennessee. Impact has additional manufacturing operations in Shaoxing, China and offices 
in Hong Kong. Impact has long-term relationships with major US retailers, including Walmart, Target, Kroger and Meijer, all of 
which have been in place for in excess of 20 years. Walmart is expected to account for nearly 20% of total Group revenue 
following the acquisition.

The Directors believe that the acquisition will: 

•  create the world’s largest consumer gift packaging business; 
•  deliver significant earnings accretion in each of the next three financial years; 
•  deliver annual synergies in excess of $5.0 million by year three; and
•  enable expansion into the growing and adjacent seasonal décor product category both in North America and in 

established Design Group markets around the world.

In the period from acquisition to 31 March 2019, Impact contributed sales of £88,693,000 to the consolidated Group revenue 
for the period ended 31 March 2019. If the acquisition had occurred on 1 April 2018, Group revenue would have been 
£489,756,000. Following the restructuring of the US business to combine manufacturing facilities into one operation, it is no 
longer possible to separately disclose the profit of the Impact business. 

Effect of acquisition of Impact
The acquisition had the following effect on the Group’s assets and liabilities.

Property, plant and equipment 

Intangible assets 

Inventories 

Trade and other receivables 

Cash 

Trade and other payables 

Provisions 

Net identifiable assets and liabilities  

Consideration paid in shares 

Consideration paid in cash 

Total consideration 

Goodwill 

Fair value adjustments were made to trade names, customer relationships and inventory.

110

Recognised  
fair values  
  on acquisition 
£000

9,313

19,000 

26,295 

31,966 

1,208 

(31,433)

(2,197)

54,152 

15,385 

66,809 

82,194 

28,042 

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The valuation techniques used for measuring the fair value of material assets acquired were as follows:

•  property, plant and equipment has been valued using market comparison and cost techniques. The valuation model 

considers market prices for similar items when they are available, and depreciated replacement costs when appropriate. 
Depreciated replacement cost reflects adjustments for physical deterioration as well as functional and economic 
obsolescence;
intangible assets are made up of customer relationships which have been valued using a Multi-period Excess Earnings 
Method (‘MEEM’) approach and brands valued using the relief-from royalty method; and
inventories have been valued at book value being cost to buy/manufacture, less provisions where this is above net 
realisable value. This is felt to be materially aligned with market value.

• 

• 

The goodwill recognised above includes certain intangible assets that cannot be separately identified and measured due 
to their nature. This includes control over the acquired business, the skills and experience of the assembled workforce, the 
increase in scale, significant synergies and the future growth opportunities that the business provide to the Group’s operations. 
The goodwill recognised arises in the USA and is deductible for tax purposes (capitalised and written down over 15 years).

If new information is obtained within one year of the date of acquisition about the facts and circumstances that existed at 
the date of acquisition which identifies adjustments to the fair values above or any additional provisions that existed at the 
date of the acquisition, then the accounting for the acquisition will be revised.

Acquisitions in the prior year
On 9 January 2018, the Group acquired the trade and certain assets of Biscay Greetings Pty Limited (‘Biscay’), a leading 
greetings card and paper products business based in Australia.

The acquisition, made through IG Design Group Australia Pty Limited, was satisfied by a cash consideration of £5.1 million 
(AU$8.9 million) using local debt facilities. The consideration represented 2.7x EBITDA for the year ended 30 June 2017 
although an injection of working capital of up to £1.7 million (AU$3.0 million) might also be required.

Biscay provides greetings cards and related products to an extensive base of almost 2,000 customers through regional, 
wholesale, and independent retail channels across Australia and New Zealand.

From the date of acquisition to 31 March 2018 the Biscay business contributed £1,253,000 to the revenue of the Group. If the 
acquisition had occurred on 1 April 2017, Group revenue for the year ended 31 March 2018 would have been £334,854,000. 
The trade of Biscay has been incorporated into that of IG Design Group Australia Pty Limited and therefore it is not possible 
to disclose separately the profit of the Biscay business.

Effect of acquisition of Biscay
The acquisition had the following effect on the Group’s assets and liabilities:

Property, plant and equipment 

Intangible assets 

Inventories 

Trade and other payables 

Deferred tax liabilities 

Net identifiable assets and liabilities  

Total cash consideration paid 

Goodwill 

Recognised  
fair values  
on acquisition 
£000

798 

921 

2,149 

(213)

(213)

3,442

5,145 

1,703

There has been no adjustment to the fair value relating to the Biscay acquisition.

32 Non‑adjusting post balance sheet events
On 5 June 2019 we entered into a new three year Group facility with a club of five banks chosen to reflect and support the 
geographical spread of the Group. HSBC continue to be significant partner and have been joined in the new facility by 
NatWest, BNP Paribas, Sun Trust and PNC. See note 17 for further details.

111

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
COMPANY BALANCE SHEET
AS AT 31 MARCH 2019

Fixed assets

Intangible assets – software 

Tangible assets 

Investments 

Total non-current assets 

Current assets

Debtors – due within one year 

Debtors – due after more than one year 

Derivative financial assets 

Cash at bank and in hand 

Notes 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

10 

2019 
£000 

— 

2 

2018 
£000

26

25

44,630 

44,632 

27,972

28,023

1,973 

2,105

28,847 

28,618

110 

58,093 

89,023 

34

10,807

41,564

Creditors: amounts falling due within one year 

11 

(5,369) 

(4,655)

Net current assets 

Creditors: amounts falling due after more than one year   

Provisions for liabilities – other provisions 

Net assets 

Capital and reserves   

Called up share capital  

Share premium account 

Capital redemption reserve 

Merger reserve 

Hedging reserve 

Profit and loss account  

Equity shareholders’ funds 

12 

14 

15 

83,654 

36,909

— 

(115) 

10

(104)

128,171 

64,838

3,918 

71,558 

1,340 

17,164 

110 

34,081 

128,171 

3,194

8,475

1,340

17,164

(91)

34,756

64,838

IG Design Group plc is registered in England and Wales, number 1401155. 

These financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors on 10 June 2019 and were signed on its behalf by:

Paul Fineman 
Director 

Giles Willits
Director

The notes on pages 115 to 124 form part of the financial statements. 

112

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
COMPANY STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

At 31 March 2017 

Profit for the year 

Other comprehensive income  
for the period 

Options exercised 

Equity-settled share-based payments 

Tax on equity-settled  
share-based payments  

Share options charge relating  
to subsidiary employees 

Equity dividend paid 

At 31 March 2018 

Profit for the year 

Other comprehensive income  
for the period 

Options exercised 

Equity-settled share-based payments 

Tax on equity-settled  
share-based payments  

Share options charge relating  
to subsidiary employees 

Shares issued 

Equity dividend paid 

At 31 March 2019 

Share 
capital 
£000 

3,132 

Share 
premium 
account 
£000 

8,429 

Capital 
redemption 
reserve 
£000 

1,340 

Merger 
reserves 
£000 

17,164 

— 

— 

62 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

46 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

3,194 

8,475 

1,340 

17,164 

— 

— 

83 

— 

— 

— 

641 

— 

— 

— 

18 

— 

— 

— 

63,065 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Cash flow 
hedging 
reserve 
£000 

146 

— 

(237) 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(91) 

— 

201 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Profit and 
loss account 
£000 

32,901 

3,017 

— 

(37) 

1,019 

198 

658 

Total 
equity 
£000

63,112

3,017

(237)

71

1,019

198

658

(3,000) 

(3,000)

34,756 

64,838

1,160 

1,160

— 

(72) 

201

29

1,478 

1,478

457 

855 

— 

457

855

63,706

(4,553) 

(4,553)

3,918 

71,558 

1,340 

17,164 

110 

34,081 

128,171

Within the profit and loss account is a cumulative amount of £2,776,000 (2018: £1,909,000) which is unrealised in respect 
of share options granted to subsidiary employees. See the consolidated statement of changes in equity for descriptions of 
reserve. 

113

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes 

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000

1,160 

3,017

3, 4 

62 

(418) 

(1,186) 

(668) 

(2,834) 

2,064 

228 

(1,592) 

4 

(948) 

1,287 

(64) 

(1,313) 

1,983 

670 

42

572

(1,064)

367

(5,884)

1,502

(144)

(1,592)

(12)

387

6,229

(72)

4,940

2,673

7,613

2,834 

5,884

4 

(13) 

—

2,821 

5,884

48,348 

2 

(4,553) 

43,795 

47,286 

10,807 

58,093 

10 

71

(3,000)

(2,929)

10,568

239

10,807

COMPANY CASH FLOW STATEMENT
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

Cash flows from operating activities

Profit for the year 

Adjustments for:

Depreciation and amortisation 

Foreign exchange (gains)/losses 

Interest receivable and similar income 

Interest payable and similar charges  

Dividends received from Group undertakings 

Equity-settled share-based payment expenses 

Taxation 

Operating loss after adjustments for non-cash items 

Decrease/(increase) in trade and other debtors 

(Increase)/decrease in trade and other creditors   

Decrease in amounts owed by Group undertakings 

Increase in provisions 

Cash (used in)/generated from operations 

Interest received 

Net cash from operating activities 

Cash flows from investing activities

Dividends received 

Acquisition of tangible fixed assets   

Net cash from investing activities  

Cash flows from financing activities

Net proceeds from the issue of share capital(a) 

Equity dividends paid 

Net cash from financing activities  

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents 

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period 

Cash and cash equivalents at 31 March 2019   

(a)  See note 22 in the Group’s financial statements.

114

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

1 Accounting policies – Company
Basis of preparation
IG Design Group plc (the ‘Company’) 
is a company limited by shares and 
incorporated and domiciled in the UK.

The Company financial statements 
present the information about the 
Company as a separate entity and 
not about the Group.

These financial statements were 
prepared in accordance with Financial 
Reporting Standard 102, the Financial 
Reporting Standard applicable 
in the UK and Republic of Ireland 
(‘FRS 102’) as issued in August 2014. 
The amendments to FRS 102, issued 
in July 2015, have been applied. The 
presentation currency of these financial 
statements is sterling. All amounts in 
the financial statements have been 
rounded to the nearest £1,000.

The accounting policies set out 
below have, unless otherwise 
stated, been applied consistently 
to all periods presented in these 
financial statements. 

Judgements made by the Directors 
in the application of these accounting 
policies that have significant effect 
on the financial statements and 
estimates with a significant risk of 
material adjustment in the next year 
are discussed in note 20.

Under Section 408 of the Companies 
Act 2006 the Company is exempt from 
the requirement to present its own 
profit and loss account on the grounds 
that a parent undertaking includes 
the Company in its own published 
consolidated financial statements.

Measurement convention
The financial statements are prepared 
on the historical cost basis except 
that the following assets and liabilities 
are stated at their fair value: derivative 
financial instruments, financial 
instruments classified at fair value 
through the profit and loss account 
and financial instruments at fair value 
through the hedging reserve.

Going concern
See note 1 to the Group accounting 
policies on page 71. Based on the 
financial performance of the Group, 
the Directors have a reasonable 
expectation that the Company has 
adequate resources to continue its 
operational existence for at least 
twelve months from the date of signing 
these financial statements. For this 
reason they continue to adopt the 
going concern basis of accounting 
in preparing the annual financial 
statements.

Foreign currencies
Transactions in foreign currencies are 
recorded using the rate of exchange 
prevailing at the date of the transaction. 
Monetary assets and liabilities 
denominated in foreign currencies are 
translated using the rate of exchange 
prevailing at the balance sheet date 
and the gains or losses on translation 
are included in the profit and loss 
account except for differences arising 
on the retranslation of qualifying 
cash flow hedges and items which 
are accounted for at fair value with 
changes taken to other comprehensive 
income, which are recognised in other 
comprehensive income.

Basic financial instruments
Trade and other debtors
Trade and other debtors are 
recognised initially at transaction 
price less attributable transaction 
costs. Trade and other debtors 
are subsequently reviewed for 
recoverability and impairment with 
any losses taken to profit and loss 
immediately. If the arrangement 
constitutes a financing transaction, 
for example if payment is deferred 
beyond normal business terms, then 
it is measured at the present value 
of future payments discounted at a 
market rate of instrument for a similar 
debt instrument.

Trade and other payables
Trade and other payables are stated at 
their nominal value which is considered 
to be their fair value. Subsequent to 
initial recognition they are measured 
at amortised cost using the effective 
interest method.

Interest-bearing borrowings 
classified as basic financial 
instruments
Interest-bearing borrowings are 
recognised initially at the present 
value of future payments discounted 
at a market rate of interest, less direct 
arrangement costs. Subsequent to 
initial recognition, interest-bearing 
borrowings are stated at amortised 
cost using the effective interest 
method, less any impairment losses.

Investments in subsidiaries
Investments in subsidiaries are 
carried at cost less any provision 
for impairment.

Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents comprise 
cash balances. Bank overdrafts that 
are repayable on demand and form 
an integral part of the Company’s 
cash management are included 
as a component of cash and cash 
equivalents for the purpose of the 
cash flow statement only.

115

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

Intangible fixed assets – 
software
Software is stated at cost less 
amortisation. Cost is amortised over 
three years to write off the asset over 
its useful economic life.

Tangible fixed assets 
– property, plant and 
equipment and depreciation
Tangible fixed assets are stated at 
cost less accumulated depreciation. 
Depreciation is provided by the 
Company to write off the cost less the 
estimated residual value of tangible 
property, plant and equipment by equal 
instalments over their estimated useful 
economic lives as follows:

•  fixtures and fittings – three to 

five years.

Provisions
A provision is recognised in the 
balance sheet when the Company 
has a present legal or constructive 
obligation as a result of a past event, 
that can be reliably measured and it is 
probable that an outflow of economic 
benefits will be required to settle the 
obligation. Provisions are recognised 
at the best estimate of the amount 
required to settle the obligation at the 
reporting date.

Where the Company enters into 
financial guarantee contracts to 
guarantee the indebtedness of other 
companies within the Group, the 
Company treats the guarantee contract 
as a contingent liability until such 
time as it becomes probable that the 
Company will be required to make a 
payment under the guarantee.

Leases
Where the Company enters into a 
lease which does not entail taking 
substantially all the risks and rewards 
of ownership of an asset, the lease is 
accounted for as an ‘operating lease’ 
and the rentals payable are charged 
to the profit and loss account on 
a straight-line basis over the life of 
the lease.

Share‑based payments
The cost of equity-settled transactions 
with employees is measured by 
reference to the fair value of the option 
at the date on which they are granted 
and is recognised as an expense 
over the vesting period, which ends 
on the date on which the relevant 
employees become fully entitled to 
the award. Fair value is determined by 
using an appropriate pricing model. 
In valuing equity-settled transactions, 
no account is taken of any service and 
performance (vesting conditions).

No expense is recognised for awards 
that do not ultimately vest.

At each balance sheet date before 
vesting, the cumulative expense is 
calculated, representing the extent to 
which the vesting period has expired 
and management’s best estimate of 
the number of equity instruments that 
will ultimately vest. The movement in 
cumulative expense since the previous 
balance sheet date is recognised 
in the income statement, with a 
corresponding entry in equity.

1 Accounting policies 
– Company continued 
Other financial instruments
Financial instruments not 
considered to be basic financial 
instruments (other financial 
instruments)
Other financial instruments not 
meeting the definition of basic financial 
instruments are recognised initially 
at fair value. Subsequent to initial 
recognition other financial instruments 
are measured at fair value with 
changes recognised in profit or loss 
except that hedging instruments in a 
designated hedging relationship shall 
be recognised as set out below:

Derivative financial 
instruments and hedging
Derivative financial instruments are 
recognised at fair value. The gain or 
loss on remeasurement of fair value 
is recognised immediately in profit 
or loss, except where it qualifies for 
hedge accounting.

Cash flow hedges 
Where a derivative financial instrument 
is designated as a hedge of the 
variability in cash flows of a recognised 
asset or liability, or a highly probable 
forecast transaction, the effective part 
of any gain or loss on the derivative 
financial instrument is recognised 
directly in other comprehensive 
income. Any ineffective portion of the 
hedge is recognised immediately in 
profit or loss.

When a hedging instrument expires or 
is sold, terminated or exercised, or the 
Company discontinues designation of 
the hedge relationship but the hedged 
forecast transaction is still expected 
to occur, the cumulative gain or loss 
at that point remains in equity and is 
recognised in accordance with the 
above policy when the transaction 
occurs. If the hedged transaction is 
no longer expected to take place, the 
cumulative unrealised gain or loss 
recognised in equity is recognised in 
the income statement immediately. 

116

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019Taxation
Tax on the profit or loss for the year 
comprises current and deferred tax. 
Tax is recognised in the profit and loss 
account except to the extent that it 
relates to items recognised directly in 
equity or other comprehensive income, 
in which case it is recognised directly 
in equity or other comprehensive 
income accordingly. 

Current tax is the expected tax payable 
or receivable on the taxable income or 
loss for the year, using tax rates enacted 
or substantively enacted at the balance 
sheet date, and any adjustment to tax 
payable in respect of previous years.

Deferred tax is provided on timing 
differences which arise from the 
inclusion of income and expenses in 
tax assessments in periods different 
from those in which they are recognised 
in the financial statements. Deferred 
tax is not recognised on permanent 
differences arising because certain 
types of income or expense are 
non-taxable or are disallowable for 
tax or because certain tax charges or 
allowances are greater or smaller than 
the corresponding income or expense. 

Deferred tax is provided in respect 
of the additional tax that will be paid 
or avoided on differences between 
the amount at which an asset (other 
than goodwill) or liability is recognised 
in a business combination and the 
corresponding amount that can 
be deducted or assessed for tax. 
Goodwill is adjusted by the amount 
of such deferred tax.

Deferred tax is measured at the tax rate 
that is expected to apply to the reversal 
of the related difference, using tax rates 
enacted or substantively enacted at 
the balance sheet date. Deferred tax 
balances are not discounted.

Unrelieved tax losses and other deferred 
tax assets are recognised only to the 
extent that is it probable that they will 
be recovered against the reversal of 
deferred tax liabilities or other future 
taxable profits. 

Employee benefits
Pensions
The Company operates a defined 
contribution personal pension scheme. 
The assets of this scheme are held 
separately from those of the Company 
in an independently administered 
fund. The pension charge represents 
contributions payable by the Company 
to the fund.

Where the Company grants options 
over its own shares to the employees 
of its subsidiaries, it recognises an 
increase in the cost of investment 
in its subsidiaries equivalent to the 
equity-settled share-based payment 
charge recognised in its subsidiaries’ 
financial statements with the 
corresponding credit being recognised 
directly in equity. Amounts recharged 
to the subsidiary are recognised as a 
reduction in the cost of investment in 
subsidiary. If the amount recharged 
exceeds the increase in the cost of 
investment, the excess is recognised 
as a dividend to the extent that it 
reflects post-acquisition profits of 
the subsidiary. 

Own shares held by Employee 
Benefit Trust 
Transactions of the Group-sponsored 
‘International Greetings Employee 
Benefit Trust’ are included in the Group 
financial statements. In particular, the 
trust’s purchases and sales of shares in 
the Company are debited and credited 
directly to equity.

Dividends on shares presented 
within shareholders’ funds
Dividends unpaid at the balance 
sheet date are only recognised as a 
liability at that date to the extent that 
they are appropriately authorised and 
are no longer at the discretion of the 
Company. Unpaid dividends that do 
not meet these criteria are disclosed in 
the notes to the financial statements.

117

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

2 Dividends paid and proposed
A final dividend for year ending 31 March 2018 of 4.00p (for year ending 31 March 2017: 2.75p) was paid on 6 September 2018. 
An interim dividend of 2.50p was paid on 18 January 2019 (2018: 2.00p). The Directors are recommending a final dividend in 
respect of the year ended 31 March 2019 of 6.00p per share (2018: 4.00p). If approved, it will be paid in September 2019 to 
shareholders on the register at the close of business on 2 August 2019.

Dividends paid in the year 

Final equity dividend for prior year 

Interim equity dividend for current year 

Dividends paid in the year 

Proposed for approval at Annual General Meeting 

Final equity dividend for current year 

3 Intangible assets – software

Cost

Balance at 1 April 2018 and 31 March 2019 

Depreciation and impairment

Balance at 1 April 2018  

Amortisation charge for the year 

Balance at 31 March 2019 

Net book value 

At 31 March 2019 

At 31 March 2018 

2019 

2018

Pence 
per share 

4.00 

2.50 

Pence 
per share 

2.75 

2.00 

£000 

2,597 

1,956 

4,553 

2019 

2018

Pence 
per share 

6.00 

£000 

4,702 

Pence 
per share 

4.00 

£000

1,734

1,266

3,000

£000

2,556

Software 
£000

86

(60)

(26)

(86)

—

26

118

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
4 Tangible assets

Cost

Balance at 1 April 2018   

Additions 

Balance at 31 March 2019 

Depreciation and impairment

Balance as at 1 April 2018 

Depreciation charge for the year 

Balance at 31 March 2019 

Net book value

At 31 March 2019 

At 31 March 2018 

5 Investments

Cost

At 1 April 2017 

Additions – share option charge relating to subsidiary employees 

Effects of movement in foreign exchange 

At 31 March 2018 

Additions – share option charge relating to subsidiary employees 

Additions – investment in subsidiary  

Effects of movement in foreign exchange 

At 31 March 2019 

Provisions

At 31 March 2018 and 2019 

Net book value

At 31 March 2019 

At 31 March 2018 

Fixtures and 
fittings 
£000

165

13

178

(140)

(36)

(176)

2

25

Total 
£000

  Shares in Group  Loans to Group 
undertakings 
£000 

undertakings 
£000 

24,546 

6,000 

30,546

658 

— 

— 

(572) 

658

(572)

25,204 

5,428 

30,632

855 

15,386 

— 

— 

— 

417 

855

15,386

417

41,445 

5,845 

47,290

(2,660) 

— 

(2,660)

38,785 

22,544 

5,845 

5,248 

44,630

27,972

119

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

5 Investments continued
The Company has the following investments in subsidiaries:

Trading companies

IG Design Group UK Ltd(c) 

IG Design Group Americas Inc(d) 

Impact Innovations, Inc.(e) 

Impact Innovations Asia Ltd(f) 

Zhejiang Shaoxing Royal Arts and Crafts Co., Ltd(g) 

The Lang Companies Inc(d) 

Anker Play Products, LLC(d) 

International Greetings Asia Ltd(h) 

The Huizhou Gift International Greetings Company Limited(i) 

Greetings Ningbo Business Consulting Ltd (formerly IG Design (Ningbo) Ltd)(j) 

IG Design Group BV (formerly Hoomark BV)(k) 

Anchor International BV(l) 

IG Design Group S.p.z.o.o (formerly Hoomark S.p.z.o.o)(m) 

IG Design Group Australia Pty Ltd(n)   

Non-trading and dormant companies 

Anker International plc(c) 

Belgrave Graphics Ltd(c)  

Britesparks Ltd(c) 

Concorde Industries Ltd(c) 

Copywrite Designs Ltd(c) 

Credit Collection Consultants Ltd(c)   

Hoopack Hoogeveen BV(g) 

Howard Industries Ltd(c)  

IG Design Group (Lang), Inc(d) 

IG Design Group Europe BV (formerly IG Europe BV)(g) 

IG Employee Share Trustee Ltd(c) 

Impact Paper Products, LLC(e) 

Impact Paper Hong Kong Ltd(f) 

Polaris Plastics Ltd(c) 

Santa’s Collection Shaoxing Co., Ltd(o) 

School Supplyline Ltd(c)  

Scoop Designs Ltd(c) 

Tom Smith Christmas Crackers Ltd(c)  

Tom Smith Crackers Ltd(c) 

Tom Smith Group Ltd(c)   

Tom Smith Ltd(c) 

Tom Smith Online Ltd(c)   

Weltec BV(h) 

Variety Accessories, LLC(e) 

(a)  Indirect holding.
(b)  50% direct/50% indirect holding.
(c)  Registered office: No 7 Water End Barns, Water End, Eversholt MK17 9EA.
(d)  Registered office: 5555 Glenridge Connector, Suite 300, Atlanta, GA 30342, USA.

120

Country of 
incorporation 

Percentage 
of ordinary 
shares held 
2019 

Percentage  
of ordinary  
shares held 
2018

 Great Britain 

US 

US 

  Hong Kong 

China 

US 

US 

  Hong Kong 

China 

China 

 Netherlands 

 Netherlands 

Poland 

Australia 

 Great Britain 

 Great Britain 

 Great Britain 

 Great Britain 

 Great Britain 

 Great Britain 

 Netherlands 

 Great Britain 

US 

 Netherlands 

 Great Britain 

US 

  Hong Kong 

 Great Britain 

China 

 Great Britain 

 Great Britain 

 Great Britain 

 Great Britain 

 Great Britain 

 Great Britain 

 Great Britain 

 Netherlands 

US 

100(b) 

100 

100(a) 

100(a) 

100(a) 

100(a) 

50(a) 

100 

100(a) 

100(a) 

100(a) 

100(a) 

100(a) 

50 

100(a) 

100 

100 

99(a) 

100 

50(a) 

100(a) 

100(a) 

100(a) 

100 

100(b) 

100(a) 

100(a) 

100(a) 

100(a) 

100(a) 

100(a) 

100(a) 

100 

100(b) 

100 

100(a) 

100(a) 

100(a) 

100(b)

100

—

—

—

100(a)

50(a)

100

100(a)

100(a)

100(a)

100(a)

100(a)

50

100(a)

100

100

99(a)

100

50(a)

100(a)

100(a)

100(a)

100

100(b)

—

—

100(a)

—

100(a)

100(a)

100(a)

100

100(b)

100

100(a)

100(a)

—

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(e)  Registered office: 233 SE 1st Avenue, Clara City, Minnesota 5622, USA.
(f)  Registered office: Flat 11A, Eldex Industrial Building, 21 Ma Tam Wai Road, To Kwa Wan Kowloon, Hong Kong.
(g)  Registered office: Floor 2, A Zone, Floor 1, Building 3, Northeast Corner of Sanjiang Road and Tanggong Road, Paojiang Shaoxing Zhejiang, China.
(h)  Registered office: 21F, 69 Jervois Street, Sheung Wan, Hong Kong.
(i)  Registered office: Fuda industrial Zone, Futian Town, Bolao, Huizho City, Guangdong, China
(j)  Registered office: 13-8, Building 003, No 3, 5 and 6 of Century Oriental Business Plaza, Yinzhou, Ningbo, China.
(k)  Registered office: Industrieweg 62, 7903 AK Hoogeveen, The Netherlands.
(l)  Registered office: Voltastraat 12, 3281 NG Numansdorp, The Netherlands.
(m)  Registered office: Jędrzychowice 116A, 59-900 Zgorzelec, Poland.
(n)  Registered office: 121 Rayhur Street, Clayton, South Victoria 3169, Australia.
(o)  Registered office: 3 Sanjiang Road West, Paojiang Ind Zone, Paojiang Shaoxing Zhejiang, China.

Class of shares held are ordinary shares for companies incorporated in Great Britain or the equivalent for the 
overseas subsidiaries.

Concorde Industries Ltd and Credit Collection Consultants Ltd are dormant companies that have never traded and both 
have net assets of £2.

6 Debtors – due within one year

Trade debtors 

Amounts owed by Group undertakings 

Other debtors 

Prepayments 

7 Debtors – due after more than one year

Amounts owed by Group undertakings(a) 

Deferred tax assets 

(a)  Attracts interest at market rate and is repayable on 31 July 2020.

8 Derivative financial assets

Financial assets designated at fair value through profit and loss 

Financial assets designated at fair value through hedging reserve 

9 Deferred tax asset

Accelerated capital allowances 

Tax loss carried forward 

Other timing differences 

10 Cash and cash equivalents/bank overdrafts

Cash at bank and in hand 

2019 
£000 

17 

2018 
£000

—

1,065 

1,892

757 

134 

58

155

1,973 

2,105

Note 

9 

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000

26,849 

26,849

1,998 

28,847 

1,769

28,618

2019 
£000 

— 

110 

110 

2019 
£000 

81 

760 

1,157 

1,998 

2018 
£000

10

24

34

2018 
£000

88

264

1,417

1,769

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000

58,093 

10,807

121

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

11 Creditors: amounts falling due within one year

Loan arrangement fees  

Trade creditors 

Amounts owed to undertakings 

Other taxes and social security 

Other creditors and accruals 

Other financial liabilities  

Note 

13 

2019 
£000 

(31) 

130 

1,533 

203 

3,534 

— 

5,369 

2018 
£000

(95)

462

398

187

3,550

153

4,655

Refer to note 17 to the Group’s financial statements for more details of the terms of the bank borrowings.

12 Creditors: amounts falling due after more than one year

Loan arrangement fees  

13 Other financial liabilities falling due within one year

Financial liabilities designated as fair value through profit and loss 

Financial liabilities designated as fair value through hedging reserve 

14 Provisions

Balance at 1 April 

Reclassified from other creditors 

Provisions made in the year 

Provisions used during the year 

Unwinding of discounted amount 

2019 
£000 

— 

2019 
£000 

— 

— 

— 

2019 
£000 

104 

43 

7 

(71) 

32 

115 

2018 
£000

(10)

2018 
£000

38

115

153

2018 
£000

149

—

—

(72)

27

104

The provisions represent a provision for an onerous lease and dilapidations provision. The dilapidations provision relates 
to a property lease that expires in August 2021. The onerous lease expires in November 2019 and the provision will be fully 
utilised at that point.

15 Share capital

Allotted, called up and fully paid

78,365,046 (2018: 63,889,942) ordinary shares of 5p each 

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000

3,918 

3,194

Of the 78,365,046 shares in the Company, 31,208 (2018: 31,208) are held by the International Greetings Employee 
Benefit Trust.

Refer to note 22 to the Group’s financial statements for details of movements and note 25 for details of share options and 
LTIP schemes.

122

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
16 Share‑based payments
Refer to note 25 to the Group’s financial statements for details of share-based payments.

17 Financial instruments
(a) Carrying amount of financial instruments
The carrying amounts of the financial assets and liabilities include:

Assets measured at fair value through profit or loss 

Assets measured at fair value through the hedging reserve 

Assets measured at amortised cost   

Liabilities measured at fair value through profit or loss 

Liabilities measured at fair value through the hedging reserve  

Liabilities measured at amortised cost 

2019 
£000 

— 

110 

2018 
£000

10

24

86,781 

39,606

— 

— 

(1,663) 

(38)

(115)

(860)

85,228 

38,627

(b) Financial instruments measured at fair value
Derivative financial instruments
The fair value of forward exchange contracts is assessed using valuations models taking into account market inputs such 
as foreign exchange spot and forward rates, yield curves and forward interest rates. 

(c) Hedge accounting
The following table indicates the periods in which the cash flows associated with cash flow hedging instruments are 
expected to occur as required by FRS 102.29(a) for the cash flow hedge accounting models, which is in line with when they 
are expected to affect profit and loss.

Forward exchange contracts:

Assets 

Liabilities 

Carrying 
amount 
£000 

2019 

Expected 
cash flows 
£000 

One year 
or less 
£000 

Carrying 
amount 
£000 

2018

Expected 
cash flows 
£000 

110 

— 

110 

5,799 

5,799 

— 

— 

5,799 

5,799 

24 

(115) 

(91) 

2,405 

6,317 

8,722 

One year 
or less 
£000

2,405

6,317

8,722

The Company uses cash flow hedge accounting in line with FRS 102.12, by entering into forward exchange contracts to 
hedge foreign exchange exposure. Fair value at 31 March 2019 was £110,000 asset (2018: £91,000 liability) recognised in 
other comprehensive income.

The amount recognised in the profit and loss account for the year was £nil (2018: £28,000 charge).

(d) Fair values
The amounts for all financial assets and financial liabilities carried at fair value are as follows:

Forward exchange contracts:

Assets – forward exchange contracts 

Liabilities – forward exchange contracts 

Total liability 

Fair value 
2019 
£000 

Fair value 
2018 
£000

110 

— 

110 

34

(153)

(119)

123

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CONTINUED
YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 2019

18 Contingencies
The Company has given, together with certain of its subsidiary undertakings, an unlimited composite joint and several 
guarantee in respect of the HSBC facilities of itself and its subsidiaries. At 31 March 2019, the Company had cash of 
£58.7 million which offset net borrowings elsewhere in the Group of £44.7 million. Therefore, the total of this guarantee at 
the year end, in relation to the Company only, was £44.7 million (2018: £20.1 million).

The Company has given HSBC Bank (China) Company Ltd a guarantee of RMB15.4 million (£1.8 million) on behalf of its 
subsidiary Huizhou Gift International Greetings Company Ltd.

As part of the Group refinancing completed in June 2016 the Company provided guarantees to HSBC banks in the 
Netherlands of €1.2 million (£1.0 million), the USA $84.5 million (£65.0 million) and in Hong Kong $18.5 million (£14.2 million) 
on behalf of the Group’s trading subsidiaries in those countries.

19 Related parties
Identity of related parties with which the Company has transacted:

Group undertakings:

International Greetings Asia Ltd;

IG Design Group UK Ltd;
IG Design Group Americas, Inc;
Impact Innovations Inc;

• 
• 
• 
•  Lang Companies Inc;
• 
•  The Huizhou Gift International Greetings Company Ltd;
IG Design Group BV;
• 
•  Anchor International BV;
• 
• 

IG Design Group S.p.z.o.o; and
IG Design Group Australia Pty Ltd.

Transactions with key management personnel – total compensation (made up solely of short-term benefits) of key 
management personnel (the Directors) in the year amounted to £1,867,000 (2018: £2,999,000). For further details see the 
Directors’ remuneration report (pages 54 to 58).

Related party transactions – transactions with Group undertakings

Management recharges 

Receivables outstanding 

Creditors outstanding 

2019 
£000 

2,613 

27,914 

(1,533) 

2018 
£000

2,546

28,741

(398)

During the year the Company paid £56,000 (2018: £62,000) for rebranding and marketing services to Mattr Media Ltd, 
a Company controlled by Joshua Fineman, who is the son of the Group CEO.

20 Accounting estimates and judgements
Management does not consider that there are any significant accounting estimates or judgements other than those showing 
in note 2 to the Group financial statements.

21 Non‑adjusting post balance sheet event 
On 5 June 2019 we entered into a new three year Group facility with a club of five banks chosen to reflect and support the 
geographical spread of the Group. HSBC continue to be significant partner and have been joined in the new facility by 
NatWest, BNP Paribas, Sun Trust and PNC. See note 17 of the Group’s financial statements for further details.

124

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ADVISERS

AWARDS

Financial and nominated 
adviser and broker
Canaccord Genuity Limited 
88 Wood Street 
London EC2V 7QR

Share registrar
Link Asset Services 
The Registry  
34 Beckenham Road  
Beckenham BR3 4TU

Design Group was delighted that 
Impact Innovations, acquired in 
August 2018, have been awarded 
Walmart’s Celebration and Seasonal 
‘Supplier of the Year’ award for 2019.

By phone:  
UK 0871 664 0300,  
Overseas +44 (0) 371 664 0300

By email: enquiries@linkgroup.co.uk

Visit us online at
thedesigngroup.com

Auditor
KPMG LLP 
Altius House  
One North Fourth Street  
Milton Keynes MK9 1NE

Public relations
Alma PR 
71‑73 Carter Lane  
London EC4V 5EQ

Registered office
No 7, Water End Barns  
Water End  
Eversholt MK17 9EA

IG Design Group plc is registered in 
England and Wales, number 1401155

Designed and produced by  

www.lyonsbennett.com

The paper used in this report is produced using virgin wood fibre from 
well‑managed forests with FSC© certification. All pulps used are elemental 
chlorine free and manufactured at a mill that has been awarded the ISO 14001 
and EMAS certificates for environmental management. The use of the FSC© logo 
identifies products which contain wood from well‑managed forests certified in 
accordance with the rules of the Forest Stewardship Council.

Printed by CPI Colour, an FSC© and ISO 14001 accredited company, who is 
committed to all round excellence and improving environmental performance as 
an important part of this strategy.

IG Design Group plcANNUAL REPORT AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 2019 I

G

D

e

s

i

g

n

G

r

o

u

p

p

l

c

A

N

N

U

A

L

R

E

P

O

R

T

A

N

D

F

I

N

A

N

C

I

A

L

S

T

A

T

E

M

E

N

T

S

2

0

1

9

IG Design Group plc
No 7 Water End Barns
Water End
Eversholt MK17 9EA
T +44 (0)1525 887 310

thedesigngroup.com